Home

Programming Guide

1. 1111 nennen nennen 2 360 823 ASSIGN NETWORK 2 362 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION 4 0 2 364 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION 2 366 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE nnn nnn 2 368 829 LAN PRINTER 2 369 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS 2 371 8 2 374 832 VOIP ACCESS 2 376 833 Fan Cen du 2 378 834 A KPKEeldale asais Eusian 2 380 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS sesssssseeeseeseeeeeeennetesesnnsa etna aate saint adis aas an asina asas a ase aaa 2 382 836 H 323 GK 2 385 CETO aon Rm 2 387 840 IP PHONE
2. 21 11 11 2 193 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP ee 2 195 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE 2 2 197 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE 4 11 2 198 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK na 2 199 607 UCD OPTIONS 2 201 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK 2 206 609 CALL LOG 2 207 611 ALLOW MESSAGING 2 4444 0001111 ath santa a aate aan 2 208 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE 2 209 614 STATION TRUNK USE 2 210 615 2 212 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page XI Table of Contents OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 616 MGI SER AS 2 214 700 COPY COS CONTENTS 2 216 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS 2 424204401011 2 217 702 TOLL DENY TABLE iiiarcoisisrsnteneresenaanaantenannsatacesauecinecaeeensectanaeeneetanteenncuetnnetcaucanes 2 221 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE 2 223 704 ASSIGN WILD 2 225 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL 2 226 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME nennen nnn nenne
3. 2 299 DBS RESTART anne 2 300 BSI STATUS cR 2 302 DBS STATUS 2 303 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF 2 304 CARRIER dH 2 305 COSTING DIAL PLAN o eraon eia de 2 306 RATE CALCULATION 2 101111 2 308 VM CARD RESTART p 2 310 ASSIGN MAILBOX QE M 2 312 AUTO RECORD e 2 314 WARNING DESTINATION 44 44 1 1 40 8 4 2 316 iA HAYE 2 317 ALARM na 2 318 ASSIGN VM MOH 2 319 VM IN OUT p n e 2 321 Ip Tcipm 2 322 ITEM COST TABLE 2 323 TAX RATE SETUP iacit enitn dite d do 2 326 ROOM COST RATE 2 329 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM esent nnns nnn tnr nenne antra annia 2 330 CHANGE TECHNICIAN 2 332 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC 1 1 entente trennt ntn nain nan 2
4. 22 22 2 ene naut rino a crack tdnedesstudecsduanratcnceuacuondednevaadieian 2 38 121 PHONE LANGUAGE 2 40 122 NEWS DISPLAY 2 42 125 EXECUTIVE STATE sisi ann en ca nhan da kie VH aaa E RE SEN RARE Cua cR seu 2 43 200 OPEN CUSTOMER 2 45 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER 2 47 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE 111 1 1111 2 48 203 ASSIGN 1 2 50 204 COMMON BELL 2 51 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL 525 2 anri t nostis eco stan nata vara urna aae Vae Ec va Va cda aa 2 52 Page VIII SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Table of Contents 206 BARGE IN TYPE 2 53 207 ASSIGN VM AA 2 54 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE 2 56 209 ASSIGN ADD ON 2 57 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER 1111 2 58 211 DOOR RING
5. PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 320 201 PRESET FNA Display shows NONE OPT BOTH 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PRESET FNA OR NONE OPT BOTH Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL PRESET FNA Press ANS RLS button to select all stations NONE OPT BOTH 3 Dial valid number via keypad 205 PRESET FNA OR 202 OPT BOTH Press Volume button to select call type and press Right Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 103 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Dial call type 0 1 or 2 205 PRESET FNA OR 202 OPT EXT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 FORWARDING MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT MMC 502 STATION FWD NO ANS TIMER Page 2 104 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER Allows a maximum 16 digits number to be entered and
6. 2 91 312 ALLOW CALLER ID 2 92 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING 2 93 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION 2 94 316 COPY STN TRK USE 2 97 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION 2 98 318 DISTINCTIVE 0 21 1 saints ansa sata aatia 2 100 319 BRANCH ee da RE da a Neven duindu rukuna nat 2 102 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page IX Table of Contents OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 320 PRESET FWD NO 2 4 11 2 103 323 CALLING PARTY 4 11 2 105 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK 00400444 0 1 1 nnne tnnt 2 107 401 Trunk Line PBX LINE 2 109 402 0222400 onus da ada aca a nn aS ck data oak A dac aaa 2 110 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS cendi trina idea nun unma na andan ana en Desa ana a Da ang a ara Vau 2 111 LUMIUDLQMITM M 2 113 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER 2 115 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT 2 117 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEAS
7. The system RAM has been cleared manual programming or resulting in a system reset 04 MJA04 MCP Reset The MCP2 has S W exception error Alarm data Reason BUS ERR Restart Bus Error ADDR ERR Restart Address Error ILLEGAL Restart Illegal opcode ZERO DIVID Restart Zero divide PRIVILEGE Restart Privilege Violation ENDL LOOP Restart Endless Loop 05 5 Reset The 5 2 or LCP2 has reset Alarm data Cabinet 1 2 or 3 06 MJA06 PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control Alarm data MCP BASE ESM 1 ESM 2 or ESM SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 399 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CODE ALARM NAME DEFINITION MJB LCP TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault 08 MJB01 HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty 09 MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the MCP2 10 MJB03 Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the cabinet 1 SCP2 11 MJB04 Memory Alarm 3 ARAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the cabinet 2 LCP2 12 MJB05 Memory Alarm 4 ARAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the cabinet 3 LCP2 13 MJB06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data IPC Queue type MCP LAN MCP SCP MCP LCP1 MCP LCP2 14 MJBO7 Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full er
8. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Continue to change other passcodes 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 48 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA RING PLAN DISAALARM ALARM CLR AA RECORD DECT REGST DELETE WLI REGIST RELATED ITEMS MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC 507 ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENTS RING PLAN PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 0000 5678 8765 4321 4321 9999 0000 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Page 2 49 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer UA key is pressed or the UA pickup code is dialled UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign Station Group for a group and then the group is entered here The device type is automatically determined by the directory number DN entered Only one of the above options can be selected If the ability to ring more than one item e g all four external page zones is required a station group containing all four zone codes must be created PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter DN of selected device SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 203 ASSIGN UA PORT Display
9. 2 153 433 COST s gzpem d sc 2 155 Page X SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Table of Contents 434 CONNECTION STATUS nn 2 156 436 TRUNK 2 159 500 SYSTEM WIDE 8 4 440111 2 161 501 iic 2 163 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS nu 2 169 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMER 2 171 504 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO 1 2 173 505 ASSIGN DATE AND 2 174 Hire izgezuliiecc enisinia daas 2 175 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME 0 40 41 2 0 61 1 2 177 508 CALL COST 2 179 510 SLI RING CADENCE 2 181 511 MSG WAITING LAMP 2 22 2 183 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT 2 184 513 HOTEL TIMER 2 185 ape elpie 2 186 515 ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING 2 187 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP 01 2 188 601 ASSIGN STATION 244 4 4 4 21 2 189 602 STATION GROUP
10. 2 1111 2 261 725 SMDR 8 44 10 1 1 1 2 267 726 VM AA OPTIONS 2 270 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY 0 40 1 2 276 728 CID TRANSLATION 2 277 730 AA RECORD GAIN e 2 279 Page XII SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Table of Contents 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 760 761 762 800 801 802 AARAM CLEAR iiti ica tide iita decre TAGEN TNR RAE Erea ESSEE 2 280 AA TRANSLATION TABLE 2 281 AA PLAN TABLE Sin icti quse kac nian NER NDA AER a Vd aa en 2 285 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE 2 290 UR CK ena dede an NA 2 292 PIE Wo 2 294 DECT SYSTEM CODE 1 2 295 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION 2 297 STATION PAIR g
11. Press Volume button to select key number and press Right Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 257 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Using above chart press dial pad key number to 1201 KEY PROG make selection 18 NONEOGPIK OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender if required or to return to step 2 5 Ifrequired enter extender e g 03 201 KEY PROG OR 18 NONE GPIK03 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGTRAMMING Page 2 258 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING This MMC is much like MMC 722 Station Key Programming The main difference is that this MMC is system wide rather than on a per station basis Features are entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table For example for OHVA the number 6 is pressed three times If the BOSS key is required press 2 for the first letter B and then use the Volume button to change selection from BARGE to BOSS TYPE OF PHONE 00 24 BTN SETS 01 12BTNSETS 03 6 BTN
12. Button Microphone Conference Button Hold Button Transfer Button Figure 1 3 DS 5021D ITP 5021D phone Page 1 4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming Programmable Buttons 14 LCD Display Soft buttons Scroll Telephone Status Indicator Volume Buttons T 7 LE lt gt IS eee EC TESS LES Sie 2 Navigation Button gt Dial Buttons SS e je Button NS Conference Button Hold Button Transfer Button Figure 1 4 DS 5014D ITP 5014D phone The DS 5000D series phones have 38 21 14 programmable buttons that a station can register any functions he she wants to use Also there are several other function buttons the dial buttons the volume button for controlling a voice volume the redial button that allows to redial the latest phone number the conference button that can be used during the conference the transfer button that is used to transfer a call received during a phone conversation to another station the hold button to hold a call for a while the speaker button and the navigation buttons that are designed for the convenience of phone users And there is the LCD display that displays the station status and various other kinds of information With three colors like red green and yellow the station status indicator displays the current status of
13. Page 2 138 CHANNEL When this option is set to YES the system will place calls on any free channel ANY of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy If set to NO you will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free BRI MODE BRI access mode select P P NOR Point to Point NORmal This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406 P P DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial This operates in a similar manner to an analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system MMC7 14 to a single device P M NOR Point to Multi point NORmal This type of circuit operates in a similar manner to P P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit Ringing is defined in MMC 406 P M MSN Point to Multi point MSN This setting is used when the line uses the MSN supplementary service Ringing is defined in MMC 421 DLSEND BRI dial sending mode select ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cell phone OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network In case of NONE MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network In other cases MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with the selected number is sent to th
14. 01 12 on which guidance data is to be displayed OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press the Right Soft button to save and move to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY IDLE DISPLAY 01 IDLE DISPLAY 02 IDLE DISPLAY 02 WELCOME TO ABC Page 2 251 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING Provides a tool for duplicating key assignment from one phone to another This can be done on a per station basis or on all stations but not on a group of stations One limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type e g same number of buttons PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Moves cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 720 201 COPY KEY Display shows FROM 2 Enter station number to copy t e g 205 205 COPY KEY OR FROM NONE Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR
15. This operation should be performed before removing the voice mail card mail card from the system PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 754 VM HALT Display shows STATUS PROC 2 Enter to halt or 0 to process VM HALT OR STATUS PROC Press Volume button to scroll the selections 3 When you select 1 to halt display shows VM HALT Press 1 to confirm ARE YOU SURE YES 4 Display shows VM HALT STATUS HALT 5 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA PROC RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 317 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 755 VM ALARM This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card This MMC will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold The threshold is measured in 90 full This means that if the MMC is set for 80 the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80 of the available drive space PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 755 ALARM Display shows THRESHOLD 80 2 Enter new threshold level VM ALA
16. MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment The range is 020 300ms Default is 100ms DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission INBAND which is industry standard H 245 type DTMF transport This sets INBAND only cannot changed TOS FIELD SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd An eight bit binary value that will be utilized by external routers switches etc that optionally support TOS bit prioritization to identify the transport priority value of data packets generated by the MGI card This value can be left at default value 00000 if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management Default is all bits O Page 2 383 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 835 MGI3 AUDIO CODEC Display shows the first option G 729A 2 Enter MGI type 0 2 via dial keypad MGI3 AUDIO CODEC OR G 729A Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad MGI3 AUDIO CODEC OR G 729A Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter MGI DSP parameter MGI3 AUDIO CODEC OR G 729 Press Volume button to make selecti
17. PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 711 LCR TIME SUN A Display shows HHMM LCRT 2 Dial day of week SUN SAT e g WED LCR TIME WED A OR HHMM LCRT Press Volume button to make day selection and press Right Soft button 3 Dial time band A D e g B LCR TIME WED B OR HEMM LCRT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial time via keypad 24 hour format e g 0800 LCR TIME WED B Cursor moves to LCRT reference MMC 712 HHMM 0800 LCRT 5 Dial time table number 1 4 LCR TIME WED B OR HHMM 0800 LCRT 1 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 235 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of an outward bound call This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE After you dial a valid digit string the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined tr
18. alarms 3 CLEAR ALARM BUF Clears alarm buffer 4 PRINT ALARM BUF Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port ALARM CODE DEFINITION See Alarm Code Definition on MMC 852 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through system alarms KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Enter leave option SPEAKER Used to store data and move to next MMC TRANSFER Enter exit MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 397 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 851 SYS ALARM REPORT Display shows VIEW ALARMS 2 Enter desired option SYS ALARM REPORT OR VIEW ALARMS Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 System displays the alarm count number date 00 02 18 14 30 and time stamp uses station configuration for 02 1 502 display format date time will be 24 hour format Alarm type and cause code will display 4 Press Volume button arrows to scroll through SYS ALARM REPORT other alarms VIEW ALARMS OR Press Right Soft button to return step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS Page 2 398 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS This MMC allo
19. source requires a dedicated SVMi port channel 1 2 XXX 3 XXX 4 XXX 5 XXX 6 XXX ring plan and destination during each ring plan The destination can be a station station group trunk or trunk group If trunk or trunk group is selected the trunks must be programmed as E amp M trunks to allow the received digits to be re sent on the facility s This 15 referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line Page 2 240 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming a An entry of the character B means to repeat the received digits NOTE NOT CW Call waiting Yes No Allow a second DID call to be received MC The number of maximum call count When this sets 99 this feature will not works When this sets 0 if a call comes that matched DID digits and DGT field then the system will be reject call When this sets between 1 to 98 if a call comes that matched DID digits and DGT field then the system counts same DID digits call and in case of the count is same or higher than this value the system sends busy signal to caller DC The number of digits to delete This is useful with Tandem switching mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line Maximum number of digits that can be deleted is 16 NAME Input up to 11 characters to identify call Names are written using the keypad Each press of a key selects a character Pressing the dia
20. 2 228 707 AUTHORIZATION 2 230 708 ACCOUNT CODE H 2 231 709 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE 2 232 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE aee ea Ach a ar Ad ni 2 234 711 COR TIME TABLE iis 2 2 25 2 235 712 CCR ROUTE TABLE ste canette teen 2 236 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT 2 238 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME nnne ntn ennt 2 240 715 PROGRAMMED STATION 2 244 716 UK LCR doa r 2 246 717 0 2 248 718 AREA M 2 249 5 205 ai aaeain 2 250 720 COPY KEY 2 252 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ee 2 253 722 STATION KEY 0 1 4 1 1 2 254 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING 2 259 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
21. 85 2 62 214 DISA ALARM RINGING 2 63 215 VOICE DIALLER 2 64 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS 0 1 2 65 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION 2 67 220 ISDN SERVICE 2 69 221 20000 tie oen aaa e dum pda 2 70 222 FAX PAIR qe 2 72 224 WAKE UP 2 73 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION ee 2 75 301 ASSIGN 2 77 302 PICKUP 22 4 0 1 2 79 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY 2 80 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE 2 82 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE 2 84 306 HOT LINE OFF HOOK 220 4 4 4 111111 2 86 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC en 2 87 309 ASSIGN STATION 00 2 89 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
22. OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DESCRIPTION FEATURES DEFAULT CONT CID ON phone user answered call CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming When OFF the Caller ID will be continue display after the AUTO ANS CO OFF phone answer mode PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 4 Press Transfer button and enter 110 Display shows Dial the option number from above list e g 4 OR Press Volume button to select the option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor Press Volume button to select ON or OFF Press the Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF Press Transfer button and enter to exit DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd When On the incoming CO call will be answered follows DISPLAY 201 STN ON OFF AUTO HOLD OFF 201 STN ON OFF HOT KEYPAD SENE 201 STN ON OFF HOT KEYPAD Page 2 21 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 111 PHONE RING TONE Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone There are eight
23. 1 The button can be used for the following special characters space amp t gt p 2 5 7 lt gt 5 Q j i ha A gt 2 and PROGRAM KEY VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 760 Display shows 2 Enter valid code number e g 02 via dial key pad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enterin item name e g ROOM COST via key pad using the method described above Page 2 324 DISPLAY ITEM CODE 00 NAME RM Deposit ITEM CODE 02 NAME ITEM CODE 02 NAME CLASS A SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax entry step 5 Enterin the tax rates in MMC 761 that apply to this item and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO ENTRIES RELATED ITEMS MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ITE TAXI CODES 02 ES 00000000 DTE TAX CODE 02 ES 11000000 Page 2
24. EST TON NO HEIDE CES NO io BESSA NO DE SHES RESTA Do ASE LES ARE YOU SURE NO SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 743 DBS STATUS MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 301 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 742 BSI STATUS This MMC shows the status of the BSI card PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 742 BSI STATUS Display shows M SUCC SUCC SUCC If status of BSI card is good the display shows SUCC 2 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 743 DBS STATUS MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER Page 2 302 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 743 DBS STATUS This MMC shows the status of the DECT base stations DBS PROGRAM
25. PORT 2 AUTO R PORT 2 JL Jung ZI ECORD 09 CALL I ECORD 09 CALL B Page 2 315 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 753 WARNING DESTINATION This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card This MMC provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the Voice Mail card if the Voice Mail card is removed or is offline In addition any calls that are forwarded to the Voice Mail card will not forward they will remain ringing at the fwd from station until answered This destination can be a station number or a group number PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to delete an entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 753 WARNING DEST Display shows DEST 500 2 Dial station number or group number WARNING DEST OR DEST 501 Press Volume button to scroll the number 3 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA 500 RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 316 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 754 VM HALT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card This MMC is used to halt the Voice Mail card take it offline It ensures that there is no traffic on the Voice Mail card when it is removed from the system
26. 1030 RING PLAN WED 1 If valid cursor moves to end time 5 1030 END 1800 Enter end time If valid system returns to step 2 Begin again 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA START NONE END NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 MMC 512 MMC 701 MMC 722 MMC 723 Page 2 178 FEATURE PASSCODE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENTS STATION COS STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 508 CALL COST Allows the system administrator to set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call This information can be displayed on the phone LCD during a call or as an SMDR record 0 UNIT COST PERMP When the system is installed to receive MP on a C O outgoing call It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses Allows a maximum value of 9999 1 CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost Ranges from 100 through 255 Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card WARNING PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left
27. 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button OR Press ANS RLS button to select all stations and press Right Soft button Enter new value must be three digits via dial keypad e g 020 System will return to step 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 201 NO ANS FWD 015 SEC 205 NO ANS FWD 015 SmC ALL NO ANS FWD 015 SEC 205 NO ANS FWD 015 SEC020 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding Page 2 169 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Dial timer number from above list e g 1 205 DTMF DUR 6 OR 0100 MS gt Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter new timer value must be four digits 205 DTMP DUR e g 0200 0100 MS 0200 System returns back to step 2 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NOANSFWD 015 SEC DUR 100 F DGT DELY 600 MSEC OFFHK SEL 015 SEC EFWD DELAY 010SEC RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 CALL FORWARD MMC 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT MMC 306 HOT LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC 726 VM AA OPTIONS Page 2 170 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMER Allows certain trunk timer values to
28. TRK RING 28500 TRK RING 2851000 RING 2890 TRK RING 28 5000 TRK RING 28 S00 TRK RING 2 501 2 117 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Page 2 118 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock up PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 407 701 TRK RELS Display shows RELEASE Y 1 N 0 2 Dialin trunk number e g 704 704 TRK RELS OR RELEASE Y 1 N 0 Press Volume button selected trunk and press Right Soft button OR ALL TRK RELS Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks RELEASE Y 1 N 0 3 Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO 704 TRK RELS Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2 RELEASE Y 1 N 0 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit
29. When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 833 TB 00 ENTRY 00 Display shows the first table number Oa Oa Oo O 2 Enter table number 00 62 via dial keypad TB 00 ENTRY 00 OR Oa 0 Oo 0 Press Volume button to make select ion and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter entry number 00 15 dial keypad TB 00 ENTRY 00 OR D 0 Press Volume button to make select ion and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter IP address via dial keypad TB 00 ENTRY 00 Cursor will be return step 3 165 213 87 110 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC entry Page 2 378 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA TB 00 ENTRY 00 MMC830 SYSTEM IP ADDR ALL OTHERS EMPTY RELATED ITEMS MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 379 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 834 H 323 OPTIONS OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed
30. 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 DAY FORMAT COUNTRY WESTERN ALL DAY FORMAT COUNTRY 205 DAY FORMAT COUNTRY ORI SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd ENTAL OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA COUNTRY WESTERN CLOCK 12 HOUR DISPLAY LOWER CASE RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 19 2 Programming 110 STATION ON OFF OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below 00 FEATURES AUTO HOLD DEFAULT OFF DESCRIPTION Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a CALL button trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call 01 AUTO TIMER ON Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk Line call 02 HEADSET USE OFF When ON this feature disables the hook switch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS RLS button 03 HOT KEYPAD ON When ON this feature allows you to dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the Speaker button 04 KEY TONE ON Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on phone 05 PAGE REJOIN ON Allows you to hear the latter par
31. 2 390 SAMSUNG Electronics OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Table of Contents 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS 2 393 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE 2 396 851 ALARM REPORTING 2 11 2 397 852 SYSTEM ALARM 5 6 2 399 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY 2 1 1 2 406 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME 2 408 855 SYSTEM 68 1 2 2 1 2 409 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS sessi eee 2 411 858 ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM 2 412 859 HARDWARE VERSION 2 413 860 UCD STATUS SERVICE 2 415 861 SYSTEM 68 0 40 2 416 890 INITIALISE PORT intct nn ener n ende natn akin Dear an oc kk ac etant aa nu tante ieri da 2 418 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 1 DS 4028E Phone 1 3 Figure 1 2 05 50380 phone iini ende EH Dee e Eo qe 1 4 Figure 1 3 DS 5021D ITP 5021D phone sse 1 4 Figure 1 4 DS 5014D ITP 5014D phone 1 5 LIST 5 Tabl
32. DIAL 6 MCID NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND DIAL 8 TG UA VDIAL DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP Programmable button Assignments FEATURE DESCRIPTION AAPLAY AUTO ATTENDANT PLAY Requires AA card AAREC AUTO ATTENDANT RECORD Requires AA card AB ABSENCE ABAND ABANDONED CALL ABW AGENT BUSY WRAP UP ACC ACCOUNT ALARM ALARM AN RLS ANSWER RELEASE BARGE BARGE IN BILL BILL Related to Hotel Motel Features BLOCK OHVA BLOCK BOOTH BOOTH Related to Hotel Motel Features BOSS BOSS SECRETARY CAD CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY CALL CALL BUTTON Page 2 254 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming CAMP STATION CAMP ON CANMG MESSAGE CANCEL CBK CALLBACK CHIN CHECK IN Related to Hotel Motel Features CHOUT CHECK OUT Related to Hotel Motel Features CHOICE CHOICE Related to News Server CLIP CALLER ID CONF CONFERENCE CONP CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY CR CALL RECORD Requires SVMi card CREDIT CREDIT Related to Hotel Motel Features CS CALL STATUS CSNR CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER REDIAL DGPALM EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION DICT DICTATION DIR DIRECTORY DIVERT EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY DLOCK DOOR LOCK DND DO NOT DISTURB DNDO DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE DP DIRECT PICKUP DROP CALL DROP DS DSS KEY DT DTS KEY EP ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP EXTMIC EXTERNAL MIC FAUTO FORCED AUTO ANSWER
33. FLASH FLASH FWRD CALL FORWARD GCONF GROUP CONFERENCE GPIK GROUP PICKUP HDSET HEADSET MODE HLDPK HOLD PICKUP HOLD HOLD HOTEL HOTEL Related to Hotel Motel Features IG IN OUT GROUP INFDSP INFORMATION DISPLAY Requires News Call Plus INQIRE INQUIRE ISPY CIDSPY LANREQ LAN REQUEST LCR LEAST COST ROUTING LISTN GROUP LISTENING LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 255 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 LOG CALL LOGGING MCID MALICIOUS CALL ID MMPA MEET ME PAGE ANSWER MMPG MEET ME PAGE MS MANUAL SIGNALING MSG MESSAGE MUTE MUTE MW MESSAGE WAIT NEW NEW CALL NND NAME NUMBER DATE NOCLIP NO CID SEND NXT CID NEXT OHVA OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE OPER OPERATOR PAGE PAGE PAGPK PICKUP PAGE HOLD PARK CALL PARK ORBIT PAUSE PAUSE PMSG PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE PROG SET PROGRAM PTHR PATH REPLACEMENT ROOM BILL Related to Hotel Motel Features REJECT OHVA REJECT RETRY AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY REVW REVIEW RING PLAN RSV ROOM STATUS VIEW Related to Hotel Motel Features RING PLAN TIME OVERIDE SETDND SET DO NOT DISTURB SETMG SET MESSAGE W O RING SG STATION GROUP SLOCAT STAFF LOCATOR Related to Hotel Motel Features SNR SAVED NUMBER REDIAL SP UCD SUPERVISOR SPD SPEED DIAL SPKR SPEAKER STATE SET EXECUTIVE S
34. Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Enter parameter data via dial keypad SYS I O PORT 2 OF BAUD 19200BPS Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SERVICE PORT 2 PCMMC PORT 3 SMDR BAUD RATE 19200 BPS CHAR LENGTH 8 BITS PARITY NONE RETRY COUNT 03 STOP BIT BIT WAIT TIME 03000 MSEC or 30 SEC DTR CHECK OFF RELATED ITEMS MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS MMC 860 UCD VIEW PCMMC CTI UCD SYSTEM ALARM CALL TRAFFIC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 337 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 805 LEVEL AND GAIN Allows the system administrator to set the base level of the TX volume on phones system wide There are eight 8 levels those are able to be controlled by the Volume button on phone And maximum controllable levels in the system are ten 10 Phone station users can vary eight levels So this MMC gives the most flexibility to the system administrator so he can classify any desired eight 8 levels within eleven 11 0 TX LEVEL CONTROL Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity Max 9 Default values are followed INDEX 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 LEVEL 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 1 MISC TSW GAIN Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or the external music source of the MISC card 0 7 higher
35. MGI3 MGI3 NEEDED MGI3 PU ITP PAGED B IP MGI3 MGI3 MGI3 RELATED ITEMS MMC 616 MGI USER MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC 840 IP SET INFORMATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming USE ER LOCAL IT DISPLAY E ER END EQUENTIAI Bd ER GENE EQUENTIAI EQUENTIAI D Li Li Li LOCAL ITP SEQUENTIAL Page 2 213 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 616 MGI USER This optional program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per port basis for IP station trunk devices If this MMC is not utilized allocation of MGI ports will be controlled by MMC615 By defining dedicated MGI port usage the IP station trunk selected will always use the port programmed MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations 2XX 2X XX private and public stations 32X X VoIP Networking trunks 83X X H 323 trunks 84 XX SIP trunks 85 XX and MGI3 facsimile Only one assignment per MGI port is permitted Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC615 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 616 3801 MGI USER Disp
36. MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 809 SYSTEM MMC SANGUAGE Allows system programmer to assign a LCD display based on system programming language 0 ENGLISH 1 GERMAN 2 PORTUGAL PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 809 SYS MMC LANGUAGE Display shows ENGLISH 2 Enter desired language number via dial button SYS MMC LANGUAGE pad GERMAN OR press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ENGLISH RELATED ITEMS MULTIPLE LANGUAGE Page 2 346 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 810 HALT PROCESSING CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet slot or in the entire system PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 810 Display shows 2 Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor Press ANS RLS button to select all cabinets and slots 3 Enter slot number via dial k
37. OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 119 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold MOH source can be heard on each trunk For the five types of selections see below TONE An intermittent tone is played to the caller NONE No Music on Hold selection 37X If X is zero 0 a chime tune is played If X is another number an external source from a MISC daughter board is played 39XX when AA is used The MOH source is provided by the AA card See MMC 736 SVMi PORT NUMBER If you have a SVMi Voice Mail System installed you may also select a SVMi recording as a music source The recording must already been defined in MMC 756 and will show up here as the SVMi port associated with the recording PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 408 701 TRK MOH Display shows current setting SOURCE TONE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 TRK MOH OR MOH SOURCE TONE Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move curso
38. OfficeServ 500 Installation Guide Introduces the installation related information for OfficeServ 500 system OfficeServ 500 Service Manual Introduces circuit configuration of each section in OfficeServ 500 system main functions parts list troubleshooting and disassembly diagram of main device DS 5012L Digital Phone User s Manual This is a user s manual for the Large LCD Digital Phone DS 5012L that can be used by connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system Page Il SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Introduction ITP 5012L IP Phone User s Manual This is a user s manual for the Large LCD IP Phone that can be used by connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system DS 5038D 5021D 5014D Digital Phone User Guide This 15 a user s manual for the 2 Line LCD Digital Phone DS 5038D DS 5012D DS 5014D that can be used by connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system ITP 5021D 5014D IP Phone User Guide This is a user s manual for the 2 Line LCD IP Phone ITP 5021D ITP 5014D that can be used by connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system OfficeServ 500 Wireless LAN Service Manual Introduces information needed to install the wireless device of the OfficeServ 500 system or for its maintenance WIP 5000M Phone User Guide This is a user s manual for WIP 5000M that is designed to use wireless LAN provided from the OfficeServ 500 system The manuals for OfficeServ 500 Wireless LAN and WIP 5000M Phone will be pro
39. Press Transfer button and enter 306 201 HOT LINE Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number 205 HOT LINE OR NONE Use Volume button to scroll through stations Press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter the hot line destination ie a station or 205 HOT LINE trunk ID e g 9 or 701 with a maximum of 9 1305P4264100 18 outgoing digits after the access code for the CO call see above list of options if needed 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 502 STN TIMERS OFF HOOK SELECTION TIMER Page 2 86 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE Assigns a background music source to the phones There are 6 possible music selections depending on the number of MISC daughter boards that are installed in the system You may also select an Auto Attendant AA port to provide continuous play of a specific recording The AA port selected must be the last port on the card If selected the BGM source will be the message defined in MMC736 from the port defined in this MMC For example if this MMC selects 201 s music source as 3966 the last port on the second AA card and MMC 736 selects Message 20 for the second AA card when extension 201 is placed on hold 201 will hear message 20 from the second installed AA card If you have a SVMi Voice Mail System ins
40. Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NORMAL STATION RELATED ITEMS HOTEL MOTEL FEATURE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 71 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 222 FAX PAIR This MMC enables a guest room to have a additional FAX line 2 This MMC is available for Hotel Motel enabled only PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 222 201 FAX PAIR Display shows NONE 2 Enter the room station number via dial keypad 202 FAX PAIR e g 202 NONE OR Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT Soft button 3 Enter the fax station number via dial keypad 202 FAX PAIR e g 2902 290 OR Press Volume button to select and press RGHT Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS HOTEL MOTEL FEATURE Page 2 72 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 224 WAKE UP ANNOUNCEMENT This MMC is enhance Wake Up feature The system will play a recorded message when a Wake Up call is answered by the user The Wake Up Announcement feature will require an Aut
41. Press a dial to display characters below on LCD depending on the number of pressing the same dial Press another dial to save the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character Press A to change uppercase lowercase input modes When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left A space can be entered by using these keys COUNT DIAL 0 DIAL 1 gt gt DIAL 2 DIAL 3 DIAL 4 Q9 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 DIAL 9 34 1 2 lt lt Oo gt DIAL 1 ni The button can be used for the following special characters space amp UN 9 3 5 7 lt 2 amp Q 5 js gt 2 and PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Moves cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL Page 2 250 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 719 Display shows 2 Press the location of the line of a large LCD
42. that will make a general access feature key more specific The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below FEATURE EXTENDER AB Absence extension number ACC Account code bin 000 999 BOOK Booking function number Station s Speed Dial Number 00 49 BOSS Boss and Secretary 1 4 CR VM Call Record CS UCD Call Status UCD group number DIR Directory dial by name type 1 3 DP Direct Pickup extension or station group number DS Direct Station Select station number FWRD Call Forward 0 7 GPIK Group Pickup 01 99 IG IN Out of Group station group number MMPG Meet Me Page 0 9 MW Message Waiting extension or station group number PAGE Page 0 9 PARK Park Orbits 0 9 RP Ring Plan 1 6 RSV Room Status View 1 5 Available in Hotel Motel enabled only SG Station Group station group number PMSG Programmed Station Messaging 01 20 SP UCD Supervisor UCD group number SPD Speed Dial 00 49 500 999 SVM 800 Group Message station group number VM VM Memo extension or station group number VT Voice Transfer VM group number NOTE When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one Page 2 14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD
43. to dial a personal speed dial number The number of users assigned to this feature is controlled by MMC215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS which allows either two 2 channels with seven 7 users or one 1 channel with five 5 users PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 216 Display shows Enter Voice Dialler number e g 3551 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to select Voice Dialler and use RIGHT Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 7 for user index number OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Dial extension number OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 3 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 3 951 3 USI USI USI DISPLAY 551 VDIAL DIAL ER 1 NONE 551 VDIAL DIAL ER 1 NONE 551 VDIAL DIAL ER 1 NONE 551 VDIAL DIAL ER 1 201 Page 2 65 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 724 DIAL NUMBER PLAN Page 2 66 SAMSUNG Electro
44. 0 to 999 seconds for example 180 seconds three minutes FIRST INTERVAL COST This is the dollar cost for the first interval duration The range is from 0 to 999 for example 345 3 45 SECOND INTERVAL DURATION This is the amount of time for the duration of each billing increment after the first interval has expired The range is from 0 to 999 seconds for example 006 seconds six seconds SECOND INTERVAL COST This is the dollar cost for each billing increment The range is from 0 to 999 for example 100 1 00 SURCHARGE This is a one time charge that is applied to the call over and above the time charges The range is from 0 to 999 for example 150 1 50 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select all ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 747 COST RATE 1 Display shows 1ST DUR 000 SEC 2 Dial COST RATE number 1 8 e g 3 COST RATE 3 OR 1ST DUR 000 SEC Press Volume button to select COST RATE and press Right Soft button to move cursor Page 2 308 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 3 Dial option number 0 4 e g 1 COST RATE 3 OR 18 COST 000 Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter
45. 000 FREE 012 2 Enter the option number 0 3 CID DSP S OR USE 000 FREE 014 Press Volume button to select 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 396 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 851 ALARM REPORTING This MMC is used to view store print or clear system alarms There are two levels of faults displayed via alarm code major alarms and minor alarms Major alarms codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously degrade the systems operating capabilities The alarm buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on a first in first out FIFO basis Alarms will provide a date and time stamp based on the system time If applicable the hardware cabinet port and or slot will be displayed If an ALARM SIO port is programmed MMC 804 alarm information can be printed on demand and also prints as alarm information is provided ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS Select one of the options 0 VIEW ALARM View alarm buffer 1 OVERFLOW CONTROL Determines buffer control when buffer is full Default is OVERWRITTEN 0 OVERWRITTEN When buffer is full the oldest entry in buffer overwritten 1 STOP RECORDING When buffer is full stop recording
46. 2 268 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DIAL 9 X Y Z 9 DIAL The button can be used for following special characters space amp gt 9 9 73 5 7 lt gt 5 1 e E s m 2 i zi E and PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 725 PAGE HEADER Display shows PRINT YES 2 Dial the option number e g 01 LINE PER PAGE OR 60 LINE PAGE Use the Volume buttons to scroll through the options and press the Right Soft button to select an option 3 Enter the option data LINE PER PAGE OR 50 LINE PAGE Use the Volume buttons to press the RIGHT LINE PER PAGE Soft button to save the data and return to step 2 50 LINE PAGE 4 press TRANSFER to exit OR Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 269 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 726 VM AA OPTIONS This MMC is used to define all the in band DTMF codes sen
47. 3 e g 2 205 FORCD CODE OR ACCT VERIFIED Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return step 2 Page 2 84 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 85 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 306 HOT LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION Allows a station the ability to make a predetermined call similar to a ring down circuit upon the expiration of a timer see MMC 502 STN TIMERS Off Hook Selection Timer The hotline destination can be a station a station group a trunk a trunk group or an external number There can be a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for the external number The access code for the trunk or trunk group access code is not counted as part of the 18 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry B Used to insert a flash code C Used to insert a pause code D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code B Used to mask unmask following digits shows as or ACTION DISPLAY
48. 4 CLS D Follow toll class D 5 CLS E Follow toll class E 6 CLS F Follow toll class F 7 CLS G Follow toll class G 8 CLS H Follow toll class H AII restricted PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 403 Display shows 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 OR DISPLAY 701 TOLL CLASS D S ENS SIN 704 TOLL CLASS USP SUN 2 ETE 920000 Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select ALL 3 Dial ring plan number 1 6 OR Use Volume button to scroll through r 1 F STN 2 F STN 704 TOLL CLASS 1 5 2 F STN ing plan numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 111 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Enter day toll class e g 2 for CLS B 704 TOLL CLASS OR 1 CLS B 2 F STN Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and use Right Soft button to move the cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to store data and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS F STN RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 507 ASSIGN AUTO RING PLAN TIME MMC 701
49. 50 bins PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER To exit programming ACTION I Press Transfer button and enter 609 Display shows first station Enter desired EXT number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor Enter valid number for bins e g 5 OR Press Volume button to make selection OR Press Hold button to delete bin s Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA PHONES 10 BINS RELATED ITEMS CALL LOG FEATURE OUTGOING CALL SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 201 LOG BLOCK 10 0070 FREE 205 LOG BLOCK 1020070 FREE 205 LOG BLOCK 50 0030 FREE Page 2 207 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING This program allows you to send a text message to a busy station or during an OHVA Up to 100 stations can be set to the system PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER To exit programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 611 201 TMSG STN Display shows NOT USED 100 FREE
50. 500 2 500 2 Dial the ring plan number 1 6 OPERATOR GROUP OR 1 500 2 500 Press the Right Soft button to advance the cursor 3 Dial the group number OPERATOR GROUP OR 18501 22500 Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA RING PLAN 1 6 500 RELATED ITEMS MMC 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Page 2 188 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP This MMC is used to build all station groups There are 40 programmable groups available in a M system and 80 for a L system The options for setting up these groups are as follows 0 This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following 0 NORMAL Used to assign stations in a ring group The members can be stations common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays 1 VMAA Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions These must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here Check all programming in MMC 726 to ensure that the In band DTMF codes are properly set 2 UCD Used to build a UCD group The system will support two methods of UCD TYPE 1 UCD The group OVERFLOW N ANS destination see below is defined as an SLT port to which you must connect
51. 60 anm Jio DNO 3054264100 SAMSUNG Electronics OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are received This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks If the ring plan destinations are not input the default ring plan is ring plan 1 Station group 500 is default in Ring Plan 1 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL trunks only ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 406 Display shows 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Press ANS RLS button for ALL 3 Dial ring plan number or press the Right Soft button to move the next step 4 Dial station number or station group number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan destination and repeat step 5 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 5 OR SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 701 1500 704 13500 A11 18500 704 1 500 704 1 205 704 13205 DISPLAY
52. 704 TRK STATUS OR 1 85 04 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter in desired option 00 12 e g 02 704 TRK STATUS OR TYPE LOOP TRUNK Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit Page 2 122 OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA FOLLOW TRUNK RELATED ITEMS MC 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK MC 401 Trunk Line PBX LINE MC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE MC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS MC 404 TRUNK NAME MC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT MC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE MC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK SSSsSs55ss5 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 123 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK Allows the system the ability to have Direct Inward System Access DISA Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature several safeguards have been added The end user must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls DISA can lockout when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired The key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call The button may be used to terminate the DISA call a
53. ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 419 725 BRI TRK Display shows first BRI channel CHANNEL ANY YES 2 Dial BRI trunk number e g 727 727 BRI TRK OR CHANNEL ANY YES Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and Press Right Soft button SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 139 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Select option item 727 BRI TRK OR CHANNEL ANY NO Press Volume button to select option item and Press Right Soft button 727 BRI TRK BRI MODE P M MSN 727 BRI TRK DLSEND OVERLAP 1721 deas CLIP TABLE NONE 172 11 dest misa NB TYPE UNKNOWN 4 Select option 727 BRI TRK OR CLIP TABLE 1 Press Volume button to select BRI station and Press Right Soft button 5 Dial BRI station number e g 729 729 BRI STN OR CHANNEL ANY YES Press Volume button to select BRI station and Press Right Soft button 6 Select option item 729 BRI STN OR CHANNEL ANY YES Press Volume button to select BRI station and Press Right Soft button 729 BRI STN POWER FEED NO 7 Select option 729 BRI STN OR POWER FEED YES Press Volume button to select option item and Press Right Soft button 8 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 140 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming
54. ASSIGN COS CONTENTS TOLL RESTRICTION Page 2 112 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 404 TRUNK NAME Allows an 11 character name to be entered to identify an individual trunk Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing button will change the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right NOTE COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL O lt gt 0 DIAL 1 Space DIAL 2 A DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 X 0 DIAL 8 DIAL 9 DIAL 4 1 x co 2 1 lt lt o x o N ni The button can be used for the following special characters space amp gt is 7 5 7 lt gt 5 Js M 2 and X PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTO
55. Assigns a Music on Hold source to the phones Any BGM source may be selected Only one external music source is provided per MISC daughter board In addition to TONE or a music a source from a MISC daughter board you may also select an AA port to provide continuous play of a specific recording The AA port selected must be the last port on the card If selected the Music on Hold will be the message defined in MMC 736 from the port defined in this MMC For example if this MMC selects 201 music source as 3966 the last port on the second AA card and MMC736 selects Message 20 for the second AA card when extension 201 is placed on hold 201 will hear Message 20 from the second installed AA card If you have a SVMi Voice Mail System installed you may also select a SVMi recording as a music The recording must already been defined in MMC 756 and will show up here as the SVMi port assigned with the recording PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 309 201 STN MOH Display shows current setting SOURCE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 STN MOH OR SOURCE Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the Cursor OR ALL ST
56. Assigns the options used for networking 0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to includes the extension number in the name field of Q SIG standard message 1 USE REMOTE VM Assign to use SVMi on remote system 2 REMOTE VM NUMBER Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote VM is used 3 REMOTE CID NUMB Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to SVMi PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 825 ADD NUMB TO NAME Display shows YES 2 Dial the option number OR USE REMOTE VM Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial YES or 0 NO OR USE REMOTE VM Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button to mover cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 366 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA ADD NUMB TO NAME YES USE REMOTE VM NO REMOTE VM NUMBER NONE REMOTE CID NUMB YES RELATED ITEMS MMC 710LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 724DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 820ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC 824NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Lt
57. BIVMS STN 01 16 YES SVMi port 01 16 calling PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 701 COS CONTENTS 01 Display shows 2 Dial COS e g 06 COS CONTENTS 06 OR TOLL LEVEL A Press Volume button to select COS number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial COS contents categories COS CONTENTS 06 e g 1 for usable feature 00 AA CALER YES OR Press Volume button to select COS categories and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial COS usable feature option e g 12 COS CONTENTS 06 OR 12 DND Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 219 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES COS CONTENTS 06 OR 12 DND NO Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 4 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE TOLL RESTRICTION Page 2 220 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 702 TOLL D
58. BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 418 Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit 2 Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card e g 733 OR Press Volume button to select the first trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Dial for YES or Dial 0 for NO Pressing 1 will advance to step 4 4 Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 419BRI OPTIONS MMC 420PRI OPTIONS MMC 423S T MODE MMC 424BRI S0 MAPPING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 725 RESTART CARD RESTART NO 733 RESTART CARD RESTART NO 733 RESTART CARD RESTART YES 733 RESTART ARE YOU SURE YES Page 2 137 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 419 BRI OPTIONS Assigns several options on a per BRI basis and there are different options depending on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423 If any changes are made in this MMC the BRI card that is affected by these changes MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS
59. CUST DBASE SMDB ARE YOU SURE NO CUST DBASE SMDB Cleared CUST DBASE SRAI DAILY SAVE 00 00 CUST DBASE SRAI DAILY SAVE 00 00 CUST DBASE SRAI DAILY SAVE 23 30 CUST DBASE SRAM COPY TO SMDB NO CUST DBASE SRAM ARE YOU SURE YES Page 2 353 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 816 CONFERENCE GAIN OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Provides a tool to adjust the gain or loss of stations and trunks in the conference bridge This is made available to allow for the adjustment of the conference bridge due to permanent unsatisfactory Trunk Line conditions that may inhibit a satisfactory conference bridge Programming adjustments can be made on individual conference analog trunk members MEMBER party conference This identifies which size of conference the adjustment will be made for ie 3 4 or 5 A TRK This identifies which analog trunk member that is being addressed CNF This is the gain or loss adjustment in the conference bridge SW This is the gain or loss adjustment in the time division switch This MMC is not to correct low volume To be used with the support of local a SAMSUNG Electronics Co distributor PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 816 Page 2 354 Display shows Press Volume bu
60. Cabinet 2 10 LCP1 CARD Shows the version of Cabinet 2 LCP 11 LCP1 B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 1 of Cabinet 2 LCP 12 LCP1 B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 2 of Cabinet 2 LCP 13 LCP1 B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 3 of Cabinet 2 LCP 14 C3 M BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet 3 15 LCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of Cabinet 3 LCP 16 LCP2 B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 1 of Cabinet 3 LCP 17 LCP2 B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 2 of Cabinet 3 LCP 18 LCP2 B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 3 of Cabinet 3 LCP OfficeServ 500 M System 0 C1 M BOARD Shows the Mother Board version of Cabinet 1 1 MCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of MCP2 2 MCP2 B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 1 of MCP2 3 MCP2 B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 2 of MCP2 4 MCP2 B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 3 of MCP2 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 413 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 859 H W EPLD VERSION Display shows MCP CARD 01 2 Enter the option number H W EPLD VERSION OR MCP B3 LAN V05 Press Volume button to scroll 3 Press Transfer button an
61. DEFAULT DATA For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks CHANNEL ANY YES BRI MODE P P DDI DLSEND OVERLAP CLIP TABLE NONE NB TYPE NATIONAL NB PLAN ISDN For BRI Ports programmed as Stations CHANNEL ANY YES POWER FEED NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER MMC 418 CARD RESTART MMC 421 MSN DIGITS MMC 423 S T MODE MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 141 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 420 PRI OPTIONS This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk board Page 2 142 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES the system will place calls on any free channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy If set to NO you will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free PRI MODE PRI access mode select NORMAL Point to Point NORmal This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406 DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial This operates in a similar manner to an analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system MMC7 14 to a single device DLSEND PRI dial sending mode select ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block simil
62. H 323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network 6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T 38 facsimile communications across a private network 7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T 38 facsimile communications on a public network 8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP phones across a private IP network The MGI ports can be allow two selection modes Sequential or Distributed The members of each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card s PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC Page 2 212 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 615 Display shows the first available option 2 Press Volume button to select an user type Press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Press Volume button to select an option and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Volume button to select an data and press Right Soft button to store data and move cursor to return to Step 1 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA LOCAL ITP MGD MGI3 PUB IP ITP MGD VOIP NTWK MGD IPNTWK MGI3 VOIP TRUNK MGD PUB IP TRK MGD
63. MADE BUSY DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 108 STATION STATUS MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS Page 2 158 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN Allows loss levels for analog trunks to be adjusted on a per trunk basis There are two adjustments available in this MMC is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station RX is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk This MMC works with 8TRK card only This MMC is not to correct low volume To be used with the support of Samsung Electronics Co local distributor PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 417 701 TRK GAIN Display shows 0 0 TX 0 0 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 via the 705 TRK GAIN dial pad 0 0 TX 0 0 Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL TRK GAIN Press ANS RLS button to select ALL RX 0 0 TX 0 0 3 Press Volume button to make selection 705 TRK GAIN Press Right Soft button to move cursor RX 0 0 TX 0 0 4 Press Volume button to make selection 701 TRK GAIN Press Right Soft button to move cursor and RX 0 0 TX 2 5 re
64. MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 17 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 109 DATE DISPLAY Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a per station basis or system wide Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button for all phones 3 Dial 0 2 to select mode OR Press Volume button to scroll through modes and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Volume button to scroll through formats and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Page 2 18 0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options O ORIENTAL MM DD DAY HH MM 1 WESTERN DAY DD MON 1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options 0 12 HOUR Displays 1 P M as 01 00 1 24 HOUR Displays 1 P M as 13 00 2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options 0 CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR 1 LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 109 201 DAY FORMAT Display shows COUNTRY WESTERN
65. MS gt _ 704 DTMF DUR 0100 MS gt _ 704 DTMF DUR 0100 5 gt 0200 OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA TIMER NAME VALUE RANGE ANS BAK TM 0600 MSEC 0 2500 MSEC CLEARING 1000 MSEC 100 9900 MSEC CO SUPV TM 2500 MSEC 10 2500 MSEC DTMF DUR 0100 MSEC 100 9900 MSEC F DGT DELY 0600 MSEC 100 9900 MSEC FLASH TIME 0600 MSEC 20 2500 MSEC NO RING TM 04 SEC 1 25 SEC PAUSE TIME 03 SEC 1 25 SEC PRS DET TM 0000 MSEC 0 2500 MSEC RNG DET TM 0050 MSEC 10 2500 MSEC WINK TIME 200 MSEC 100 300 MSEC MF DP INT 0800 MSEC 100 9900 MSEC MFR DLY TIME 00 SEC 0 25 SEC RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 172 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 504 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make break time This will only affect rotary dial trunks 0 Make Break Ratio 01 99 Pulse Per Second 10 or 20 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 504 MAKE BREAK RATIO Display shows 33 2 Dial 0 or 1 for option PULSE PER SECOND OR 10 5 Press Volume button for selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial new value PULSE PER SECOND Syst
66. NAT routers firewalls etc Default is 9000 06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used PRIVATE or PUBLIC Default is PRIVATE 07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone s DSP will use G 729A low bandwidth or G 711 high bandwidth This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection only others case are follow MGI CODEC type Default is G 729A 08 PHONE TYPE This the type of IP phone used SAMSUNG or SIP future Please should be use SAMSUNG 09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular IP phone This is similar to phone out and plug in and the useful for maintenance Because technician will be re registered IP phone without network cable find out first 10 FRAME COUNT This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone This data uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN PHONE DATA only The range is 10 40ms Default is 10ms 11 Page 2 390 JITTER SIZE Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment This data uses case of MMC 841 DSP DOWN PHONE DATA only The range is 10 90ms Default is 20ms SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 12 TOS FIELD An eight bit binary value that will be utilized by external routers switches etc that optionally support TOS bit prioritization to identify the transpo
67. OPERATOR GROUP MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS Page 2 192 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 602 STATION GROUP NAME Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11 character name to identify an individual station group Names are written using the keypad Each press of a key selects a character Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAMSUNG press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 2 once to get the letter Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing A button changes the letter from upper case to lower case When the character that you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move cursor left A space can be entered by using these keys When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL lt gt 0 DIAL 1 Space 1 1 DIAL 2 A B C 0 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 96 5 DIAL 6 M N 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V 8 DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9 DIAL E The button can be used for the foll
68. OR 03 gt Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press the Right Soft button to select a station OR Press ANS RLS button to select ALL 3 Dial speed option 03 10 205 CALL SPEED 03204 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA 03 RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 42 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 125 EXECUTIVE STATE Allows the system administrator or technician to set executive station s the following options 0 EXEC STATE When inter working with EASYSET the state of executive station can be displayed 1 STATE IN If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS IN the EASYSET display this message 2 STATE OUT If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS OUT the EASYSET display this message 3 ANSWER MODE When the secretary call by BOSS key the executive station ringing or automatically answer follows this option State display messages are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the message is CONFERENCE press the number 2 three times to get the letter Now press the number 6 three times to get the letter O Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the bottom left programmable button will change the letter from upp
69. PCM input gain value of DSP The range is 31dB 32dB 0 63 This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site Default is 32 0 dB 06 VOICE VOL This value selects the voice volume The range is 31dB 31dB 0 63 Default is 32 0 dB 07 FRAME COUNT This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card The range is 020 240ms Default is 40ms 08 JITTER OPT This is a scale value that introduces a intentional buffer delay of the transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card This value determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay The range is 00 12 Default is 4 09 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment The range is 010 300ms Default is 30ms 10 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment The range is 010 300ms Default is 150ms Page 2 382 11 FAX ECM This option selects retry of Fax over IP in the case that errors are detected Default is ENABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 12 MAX FAX CNT CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This is maximum number of channels that can be simultaneously utilized for Fax over IP The range is 00 16 Default is 2 13 DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission INBAND which is industry standard H 245 type DTMF transport and OUTB
70. PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 317 001 USE 001 Display shows DIAL YES 2 Dial the station use group number e g 005 005 USE 001 OR DIAL YES Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button OR ALL USE 001 Press ANS RLS button to select all station use DIAL YES groups 3 Dial the station use group number e g 004 005 USE 004 OR DIAL YES Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO 005 USE 004 OR DIAL NO Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 98 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA DIAL YES RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 316 COPY STATION TRUNK USE MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 99 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific station or when a spe
71. Program No OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Program Description Page 1 14 MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE MNC 833 VoIP IP TABLE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MNC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MNC 836 H 323 GK OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC 840 IP PHONE INFOMATION MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MNC 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MNC 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MNC 858 ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM MMC 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MNC 860 UCD STATUS SERVICE MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS MNC 890 INITIALIZE PORT SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming 5 Overview of Programming Procedure Here the order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method of each list Please read the description carefully before programming The programming order is as follows 1 2 3 4 Make programmable state Press the Transfer button at pause Enter the program number either 200 or 800 Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode Press 1 dial button to enable the programming mode In case of Program 800 Tec
72. REPORT YES Use Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO 705 TRK ABNDN OR REPORT NO Use Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Page 2 132 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS REPORT YES RELATED ITEMS MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS MMC 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 133 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 416 ASSIGN E amp M DID RINGDOWN This MMC defines which ring destination table an E amp M or DID trunk will follow for incoming calls There are three options for each trunk as defined below 0 FOLLOW INCOM DGT When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at the destination that matches the digits received from the Trunk line 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS When trunk is set to this option calls will ring at the destination defined in MMC 714 that matches the digits received from the TRUNK LINE 2 FOLLOW TRK RING If this option is selected press the Right Soft button and NO RCV DIGIT will appear on the display Here is where the number of incoming digits from Trunk Line must be 0 through 4 When a t
73. SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 1 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 2 Phone Buttons There are several phones that are allowed for MMC programming DCS Euro phones 24B 12B 6B LCD DS 4000 series phones DS 4028E DS 4018E DS 4008E DS 5000D series phone DS 5038D DS 5021D DS 5014D and ITP 5000D series phone ITP 5021D ITP 5014D VOLUME CONTROL BUTTONS SOFT BUTTONS 3 SCROLL BUTTON Volume control for handset Uesd activate Uesd to select start menu and Ring speaker ect Features via the display scroll through display options PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS With tri coloured LEDs 24B keyset has 16 Buttons 12B keyset has 8 Buttons SCROLL REDIAL MEMORY REDIAL BUTTON MEMORY BUTTON DO NOT DISTURB BUTTON SPEAKER BUTTON ec x DND SPEAKER 4108 Se TRSF RECALL m HOLD ANS RLS CO 8 I CIC PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS With red LEDs 24B has 8 Buttons 12B has 4 Buttons mi MICROPHONE SPEAKER For hands free operation PULLOUT Used in place of handset DIRECTORY TRAY C M NN M 2 TRANSFER BUTTON HOLD BUTTON ANSWER RELEASE BUTTON RECALL BUTTON mm ww 21 DCS Euro phones The following figure shows the shape of 24B 12B LCD DCS Euro phone 24B LCD phone has 24 programmable buttons left column is numbered 1 1
74. SET AUTO ATTENDANT MUSIC ON HOLD SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 291 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 735 AA USE TABLE Determines what plan will answer each call Each AA is assigned a specific plan and each AA group assigned in MMC 601 is assigned a specific plan When a call is received by an AA port the appropriate plan will answer the call depending on the port or group that was called You programming what port answers but what port is called The following example shows how flexible this system is AA PLAN TO ANSWER AA PORT OR GROUP 3951 PLAN 01 3952 PLAN 02 3953 PLAN 03 AA GROUP 510 3951 3952 3953 PLAN 04 AA GROUP 511 3951 3952 PLAN 05 AA GROUP 512 3953 3954 PLAN 06 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 735 Display shows first AA group e g 510 2 Enter AA port or AA group number OR Press Volume button to select a AA port or group and press Right Soft button to move cursor Page 2 292 518 AA PLAN PLAN NO 01 510 AA PLAN PLAN NO 01 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 3 Enter AA plan number 510 AA PLAN PLAN NO 04 Press Volume bu
75. Step 1 10 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA INDEX DIGIT 1 6 cw MC DC NAME 001 d B N 99 0 NONE 002 ge B N 99 0 NONE 003 Bee B N 99 0 NONE 004 ps B N 99 0 NONE RELATED ITEMS TRUNK PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 243 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed Messages are written via the keypad Each press of a key will select a character Pressing a different key will move the cursor to the next position For example if the message is Sunbathing press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 8 twice to get the letter U Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the A button will change the letter from upper case to lower case character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume NOTE Down button to move the cursor to the left A space can be entered by using these keys e When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL gt 0 DIAL 1 Space DIAL 2 A DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 95 72 x lt
76. TEX AA AUTO ATTENDANT VM VOICE MAIL PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 413 701 CTYPE AP N Display shows AT N AA Y VM N 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 702 702 CTYPE AP N OR AT N AA Y VM N Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks 3 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO 702 CTYPE AP N OR AT N AA Y VM N Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA AP NO AT NO AA YES VM NO RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 129 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 414 PRS SIGNAL Used on a per trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse MPD or a Polarity Reversal Signal PRS trunk A Meter Pulse Trunk will detect a C O provided meter pulse A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line When the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call If the trunk is designated as PRS detection the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on th
77. Transfer button and enter 811 SYSTEM RESTART Display shows RESET SYSTEM NO 2 Enter reset type 0 2 via dial keypad SYSTEM RESTART OR CLEAR MEMORY NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO SYSTEM RESTART CLEAR MEMORY YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO SYSTEM RESTART ARE YOU SURE YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Page 2 348 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Ifclear memory system will return with default time and date and default extension number OR If system just restarted it will return to normal programmed status DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Page 2 349 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 812 SET COUNTRY CODE OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 This MMC must be run by the installer before any other programming is done Allows the system installer to select system software country If you change the country selection the system will be restart and all customer data returns to defaulted status according to the selected country PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Pr
78. Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL LOOP ISDN TRUNKS 9 ALL TIE TRUNKS 801 ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS 803 ALL VOIP H 323 TRUNKS 804 ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS 805 RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING VOIP NETWORKING FEATURE VOIP GATEWAY FEATURES Page 2 196 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones Each page zone can have up to 99 members A phone may be assigned to more than one zone Page zone will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page zone 0 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 604 INT PAGE ZONE 0 Display shows MEMBER 01 NONE 2 Enter the page zone number 0 4 e g 3 INT PAGE ZONE 3 OR MEMBER 01 NONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter index number e g 05 via dial keypad INT PAGE ZONE 3 OR MEMBER 05 NONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter station number e g 205 via dial keypad INT PAGE ZON
79. UCD OPTIONS Page 2 248 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 718 MY AREA CODE This MMC defines the home area code and country code This information is used for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME U KEYPAD U sed to scroll through options sed to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Moves cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 718 MY AREA CODE Display shows AREA 2 Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA MY AREA CODE OR AREA Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter area code maximum 4 digits via dial MY AREA CODE keypad e g 2 and press Right Soft button to AREA 2 move cursor back to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS TRUNK PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 249 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 719 IDLE DISPLAY This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones Use dial buttons to enter guidance data in English
80. UDP port used on a SIP phone call Default is 5070 05 RE TRANS T1 TIME The initial re transmission time if no answer based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900ms Default is 500ms 06 RE TRANS T2 TIME The maximum re transmission time if no answer based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900ms Default is 4000ms 07 RE TRANS T4 TIME The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the ACK message Based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900ms Default is 5000ms 08 GENERAL RING TM The server shall retransmit the response during this amount of time until the requested retransmission is received For example the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO The range is 0 99900ms Default is 5000ms 09 INVITE LING TM After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response the client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message The client waits for this amount of time after sending ACK for the Final Response The range is 0 99900ms Default is 5000ms 10 PROVISIONAL TIME After receiving the Provision Response the User Agent shall wait for this amount of time until Timeout ends The range is 0 999900ms Default is 180000ms 11 INV NO RESP TIME SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request the User Agent shall wait for this amount of time The range is 0 99900ms Default is 5000ms Page
81. USE 301 Display shows DIAL YES ANS YES 2 Dial the station use group number e g 005 005 USE 301 OR DIAL YES ANS YES Press Volume button to select station use group and press Right Soft button OR ALL USE 301 Press ANS RLS button to select all station use DIAL YES ANS YES Group 3 Dial the station use group number e g 304 005 USE 304 OR DIAL YES ANS YES Press Volume button to select trunk use group and press Right Soft button OR 005 USE ALL Press ANS RLS button to select all trunk use DIAL YES ANS YES group Page 2 82 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Volume button to select YES NO option 005 USE 304 OR DIAL NO ANS YES Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT Soft button to move cursor to ANS option Press Volume button to select YES NO Option 005 USE 304 OR DIAL NO ANS YES Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA DIAL YES ANS YES RELATED ITEMS MMC 316 COPY STATION TRUNK USE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 83 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE This MMC allow
82. and enter 726 Display shows 2 Enter the OPTION number from the above list e g 3 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button for selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 press TRANSFER to exit OR Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS MMC 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY EXT FOR DN1 YES TRK FOR DN2 NO TRK FOR DN2 K ES Page 2 275 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY This MMC is only used for system version display This is a READ ONLY MMC PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 727 MCP VERSION Display shows WE 0701 MOS 2 Press Volume button to select other Card versions DLI CARD C1 S2 8 Cabinet and Slot shown NO VERSION DATA TEPRI CARD PRI MODE C2 S1 TEPRI EP Cabinet and Slot shown 01 08 14 V1 02 AUTO ATTENDANT CARD C1 S8 AA Cabinet and Slot shown 00 09 19 1 00 3 Press TRANSFER to exit OR Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page
83. be changed on a per trunk basis or for all trunks It is not advisable to change these values with the exception of trunk Flash Time without assistance from Technical Support SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd ANS BAK TM ANSwer BAcK TiMe This timer is used for certain types of E amp M signaling and does not affect normal CO lines CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the expiration of this timer CO SUPV TM CO SUPerVision TiMe this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect received from the CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system DTMF DUR DTMF DURation This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO on this line F DGT DELY First DiGiT DELaY This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit when FLASH key is pressed NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the call has disconnected PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial bin PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse If the PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maint
84. button to move the cursor to the right COUNT DIAL 0 DIAL 1 gt Space DIAL 2 DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 DIAL 9 2 lt lt 42 gt N O DIAL 1 ba The button can be used for the following special characters space amp p 3 iA 3 73 5 gt lt gt 5 ls S ES h 5 gt 2 and Page 2 32 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 117 201 TXTMSG 01 Display shows Blank Message 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 TXTMSG 01 OR Blank Message Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 01 10 to select message 205 TXTMSG 02 OR Blank Message Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter messages using above table and press Right 1205 02 Soft button to return to step 3 SAME TIME 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Pr
85. button to select trunk or station and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 8 to select ring tone OR Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 5 to select ring cadence OR Press Volume button to select ring cadence and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA F STN FOLLOW STATION SETTING RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY 201 RING TONE T F STN C F STN 705 RING TONE 705 RING nes C F STN 705 RING TONE mes C83 Page 2 101 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 319 BRANCH GROUP Allows the assignment of stations into branch groups There is a maximum of 99 branch groups When CO ring is ringing at station assigned the same branch group can answer the incoming call by off hook PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 319 Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select all stations
86. control by caller 01 ABSENCE YES Absence 02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear 03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy 04 CALLBACK YES Callback 05 CLIP ABN YES Caller ID Abandon 06 CLIP INQ YES Caller ID Inquire 07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate 08 CONFER YES Conference 09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear 10 DIRECT YES Directory dial 11 DISA YES Allow DISA use 12 DND YES Do Not Disturb 13 DND FWRD YES Forward Do Not Disturb 14 DND OVRD YES Do Not Disturb override 15 DOOR YES Door ring answer 16 DSS YES Direct station select 17 DTS YES Direct trunk select 18 EXT AREC NO Intercom call automatic record SVM 800 19 EXT FWD YES External call forward SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 217 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 1 COS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 20 FEATURE YES Transfer button 21 FLASH YES Trunk flash 22 FOLLOW ME YES Call forward follow me 23 FORWARD YES Call forwarding 24 FWDTOVMS YES Call forward to SVM 800 25 GRP I O YES Group in out 26 HOLD YES Hold 27 HOTLINE YES Hot line and Off hook selection 28 INTERCOM YES Intercom call 29 MCID YES MCID on ISDN incoming call 30 MESSAGE YES Message 31 MM PAGE YES Meet me page 32 NEW CALL YES New call 33 OHVAED YES Receive Off hook voice announcement 34 OHVAING YES Make Off hook voice announcement 35 ONEA2 YES 1A2 emulation 36 OPERAT
87. e g 050 ROUTE 05 2 OR C 4 6 801 M 050 Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR LCR ROUTE 05 2 Press Right Soft button to skip step and move C 4 G 801 cursor to step 2 7 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 237 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE This program entry is also referred to as Outgoing dial Rules This will give the system the ability to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call A perfect example is the adding of a digit 1 An advantage is to insert a common carrier network access code of 1010288 With these digits inserted a long distance call will be placed over a local line utilizing the common carrier network The characters and can also be entered There are 200 modify digit entries available OPTION MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGIT ENTRIES Number of digits to delete 15 Insert before dialling string 14 Append after dialling string 14 DIGIT STRING KEY Insert String Digit String delete Append String PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTON
88. guest has checked into a room 94 Check out A guest has checked out of a room 95 Available A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE 96 Occupied A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED 97 Clean Room A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING 98 Fix Room A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE 99 Hold A room has been flagged as HOLD a Available in Hotel Motel enabled only NOTE NOTE Names for the items are written using the keypad Each press of a key will select a character Pressing the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the A button will change the letter from upper case to lower case SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 323 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 2 3 DIAL 0 lt gt A a DIAL 1 DIAL 2 A mo DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 2 lt lt DIAL 9 DIAL
89. is on hook Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 90 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more than 10 96 Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 91 06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more Page 2 404 than 500 ms Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through system alarms KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Enter leave option SPEAKER Used to store data and move to next MMC TRANSFER Enter exit MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 852 01 7 01 ACT OFF Display shows POR Restart 2 Enter desired Alarm Display number e g 61 61 01 ACT OFF OR Card Out Press the Volume buttons to select desired option and press the Right Soft button and to advance the cursor 3 To select if the alarm is active press 1 for 61 01 ACT ON YES and 0 for NO Card Out An entry will advance the cursor to return to Step 2 OR Press the Volume buttons to make selection and press the Right Soft button to save and return step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL OFF RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENT MMC 723 SYSTEM WIDE KEY ASSIGNMENTS MMC 851 SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING MMC 853 MAINT
90. lt Or CD gt vN DIAL 9 DIAL 1 The button can be used for the following special characters space amp ls j 9 29 7 lt es 5 Q b s 5 hs a s 3 and X There are 15 messages in the system MESSAGES 01 10 are 16 character pre programmed default messages Any of them can be changed MESSAGES 11 15 are 16 character blank messages that can be created Page 2 244 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Toggles from upper case to lower case ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 715 PGM MESSAGE 01 Display shows GIVE ME THE CALL 2 Enter index number e g 11 PGM MESSAGE 11 OR Blank Message Press Volume button arrow to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter message via dial keypad using the above PGM MESSAGE 11 table maximum 16 characters SunBathing Use A button to toggle upper case lower case Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES AS DETAILED BELOW 01 GIVE ME THE CALL 0
91. new message FIRST MSG 25 OR Press Right Soft button and advance to next 530 UCD GROUP option using the Volume buttons to select an UCD RECALL 10 SEC option 3 Press Right Soft button and advance to next 530 UCD OPTION option Use the Volume buttons to make a UCD RECALL 10 SEC selection OR make a selection using the dial pad Page 2 204 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press the Left Soft button to ENTER the 530 UCD OPTION selection and to return to Step 1 EXIT CODE NONE OR Press the Right Soft button to return to Step 3 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA FIRST MSG 61 SECOND MSG 62 EXIT CODE NONE RETRY COUNT 03 FINAL DEST 500 RING NEXT 30 SEC UCD RECALL 10 SEC MOH SOURCE NONE WRAP UP 10 SEC AUTO LOG OUT ON ALL OUT TO FINAL OFF AGENT PIN NO OFF GBUSY NEXT OFF RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 733 AA PLAN PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 205 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK Provides means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays The free list will show how many bins are lef
92. options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 107 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION T Press Transfer button and enter 400 Display show Dial trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button to select trunk OR Press ANS RLS button for all trunks and press Right Soft button to move cursor to options Dial option number from above list 0 4 OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF OR Press Volume button to select ON OFF and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION LCR PROGRAMMING CALL FORWARD Page 2 108 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DISPLAY 701 TRK ON OFF 1A2 EMULATE OFE 704 TRK ON OFF 1A2 EMULATE OFE ALL TRK ON OFF 1A2 EMULATE 704 TRK ON OFF TRK FORWARD ON 704 TRK ON OFF FORWARD OFF SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 401 Trunk Line PBX LINE Used to se
93. options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor or select option SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC TRANSFER Exit Page 2 406 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION l Press Transfer button and enter 853 Display shows busy functions Enter busy function type 0 8 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter station number OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit Press Speaker button to advance the next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL IDLE RELATED ITEMS MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY MAINTENANCE BUSY MAINTENANCE BUSY STN MAINTENANCE BUSY STN 2012IDLE MAINTENANCE BUSY STN 201 gt 05 Page 2 407 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time The system diagnostics tests include memory audits internal loopback tests on digital trunks DSP AA DSP tests Additional tests include CODEC tests on analog trunk and
94. previous entry A Used to wild card X entered B Used to wild card Y entered C Used to wild card Z entered ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 702 Display shows Dial index number e g 005 OR Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter toll pattern via dial pad e g 202 OR Enter wild card e g 21 X from above list and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark e g E Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY ALOW 001 BCD EFG 000000 ALOW 005 BCDI EFG 000000 LOW 005 BCD 2029 0000 LOW 005 BCD 20X 0000 ALOW 001 BCDI 202 0001 EFG 00 EFG 00 EFG 00 Page 2 223 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0 RELATED ITEMS Page 2 224 MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Provides flexibility to toll
95. ring tones available at each phone A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 111 201 RING TONE Display shows SELECTION 5 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 RING TONE OR SELECTION 5 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL RING TONE Press ANS RLS button to select SELECTION 3 Dial 1 8 to select ring tone 205 RING TONE OR SELECTION 5 Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA FREQUENCY 5 RELATED ITEMS MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME Page 2 22 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock appointment reminder feature for any station This must be done for single line telephones as they cannot access programming Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one time or TODAY alarm or a
96. route a caller to any group extension or another plan Each port can answer calls with a different plan as defined in MMC 735 This MMC includes options to select messages to play to a caller These messages can be as follows MESSAGES 01 48 These can be created using the AAREC Soft button programmed on phones by using MMC 722 or 723 A total of two minutes of message time is available MESSAGES 49 64 These are pre programmed as follows The announcement may be different according to the AA MSG ROM 49 Thank you for calling please dial your party s extension number 50 Invalid number please try again 5 I m sorry there is no answer 32 sorry that station is busy 53 One moment please 54 Transferring 55 transfer you 56 Good bye 57 Thank you 58 Please hold for the operator 59 Please hold for assistance 60 Thank you good bye 61 I m sorry all stations are presently busy 62 sorry all stations are still busy 63 Please call back later 64 I m sorry not a valid selection PLAN MESSAGE RING PLANS 01 06 This is the message that will be heard by the caller when the AA port answers a call if the telephone system is in a particular ring mode or if another message has been selected by the AA administrator This message has a default selection of AA ROM message number 49 but it can be replace
97. seconds a call has been waiting at the UCD group before the UCD group s SUPV key begins to flash along with an audio alarm For more UCD alarm conditions see MMC 500 UCDS VISUAL ALAM 0 0 990 SEC When an AA card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call at the UCD group before the UCD group s SUPV key begins to flash as an alarm For more UCD alarm conditions see MMC 500 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 167 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 RANGE TIMER NAME DEFAULT DESCRIPTION UNIT VMS UCD MSG TIME 5 1 99 SEC When this timer expired the call return to idle member Requires SVM 800 VOICE DIAL DELAY 8 5 15 SEC This timer monitors the duration of interaction between main software and Voice Dialler If there is no response from Voice Dial card within this time the system decide the voice dialling is fail Certain timers disabled when the value is 0 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 501 AA INT DGT TIME Display shows first timer value 05 SECO 2 Press Volume button to select timer and press KMMC LOCK OUT TM Right Soft button to move cursor 060 SECO 3 Enter new value using keypad if valid sys
98. select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 422 701 TRK COS Display shows first trunk OSI 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 TRK COS OR 1 01 2 01 3 01 Use Volume button to scroll through trunks Press Right Soft button to advance step 3 OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and press Left Soft button to advance step 4 OR ALL TRK COS Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks 1 01 2 01 3 01 3 Enter day class of service e g 05 705 TRK COS OR 1 05 2 01 3 01 Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance step 4 OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2 Page 2 146 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Enter the next ring plan class of service 705 TRK COS e g 05 1 05 2 05 03 01 OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to the previous step 5 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS COS 01 RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 147 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500
99. select number and press Right Soft button 4 Dial SECRETARY station number e g 201 BOSS STN 205 OR SECR 1 201 Press Volume button to select station Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to BOSS STN 205 enter more SECR numbers SECR 2 202 Page 2 80 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 5 Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and continue entries OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 81 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE Allows trunk use groups on a per station use group basis the ability to answer incoming calls to dial out or to do both If a station is set to NO Dial the station will not have the ability to place a call If the station is set to NO Answer the station cannot answer an incoming call Stations are set within the use group number 001 300 and trunks are within the use group number 301 500 at MMC 614 ASSIGN USE GROUP PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 304 001
100. send data in the DNI field indicating that a trunk is ringing the VMAA port If set to no when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send trunk data in the DNI field Default No EXTENSION FOR DN If set to yes when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating station of the call ringing the VMAA port If set to no when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send station data in the DN2 field Default No Page 2 270 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming TRUNK FOR DN If set to yes when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port If set to no when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN2 field Default No SEPARATOR When both DN1 and DN2 are used a digit defined here 1s sent between and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine where DN 1 stops and where DN 2 starts The separator can be 0 through 9 A Bor Default No DISCONNECT SIGNAL This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in place of a disconnect open The digit defined here is sent three times Default C CALLER ID NUMBER If set to yes when t
101. single digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC323 should be entered here This is only used when 405 value is null Default is1 18 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is used as a H 323 gateway 0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING Follows MMC406 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS Follows MMC714 default 2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT Follows MMC724 19 ALLOW GW CHECK PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME KEYPAD When using a gatekeeper this permits the H 323 gateway to check for gatekeeper presence Default is DISABLE Used to scroll through options Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Page 2 380 Used to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 834 GATEWAY CALL ID Display shows the first option 1234 2 Enter H 323 option number 00 19 via H 323 FAST SETUP dial keypad DISABLE OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter H 323 option data via dial keypad H 323 FAST SETUP OR ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 405 CO LINE
102. some type of announcement device to play to callers while they are on hold Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations The announcement device must be able to terminate the announcement with a hook flash and a transfer back to the UCD group b Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the announcement in its entirety d Itis possible that a new caller may jump ahead in the queue if a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement device TYPE 2 UCD The group OVERFLOW N ANS destination see below is defined as an AA port or group This will only work if an AA card has been installed in the system The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded announcements to callers in queue The first announcement is played only once the second announcement will repeat for as long as the caller is in queue This type of UCD group has the following advantages No external device need be installed to provide an announcement b Multiple callers can hear the announcement s simultaneously c Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free UCD group member agent as soon as the agent becomes available d The callers place in queue is always maintained Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC 607 There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a system due to availability of
103. station SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 5 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Cautions in Programming Programming can be done while the handset is placed on the phone at a idle state Programming can be done on any phone Programming can be done only on the phone not on normal phone e Ifthe phone does not have the LCD display press the numbers using the dial buttons as instructed by the programming guide without using the volume buttons However if the phone does not have Soft buttons certain programming cannot be done Therefore only the station level programming is allowed on the phone that does not have the LCD display e Ifthe LCD displays an INVALID DATA message while programming this means that the entered data 1s invalid Enter the correct data again The content of the displayed message for each step shows the status after each step 15 executed fno key is pressed for a certain period of time during programming Key program end time default is 60 seconds it becomes a idle state from programming mode Ifthe phone is off hook while programming it becomes a dial state from programming mode Before the modified data is confirmed by pressing Left Soft button or Right Soft button the Speaker or Transfer button is pressed to make it at a idle state or the phone 15 unplugged In this case the data entered up to that time will be automatically sav
104. the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing button will change the letter from upper case to lower case NOTE When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 gt 0 DIAL 1 1 DIAL 2 A B C 2 DIAL 3 D 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 96 5 DIAL 6 M N O 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V 8 DIAL 9 X Y 2 9 DIAL The button can be used for the following special characters space amp lt gt S565 biS gt and PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case Page 2 8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 104 Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter the station name using the procedure descr
105. the second member if the second member is busy calls will go to the third member etc This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls to a selected individual with other members only getting the calls when the first member is busy The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 48 1 DISTRIBUTED The first call will go to the first member the second call will go to the second member the third call will go to the third member This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call among all group members The number of members allowed for a distributed group is 48 2 UNCONDITIONAL Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32 If a group member is busy they can receive off hook ring if defined in MMC 300 This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode OVERFLOW This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin also ringing the NEXT PORT see below after this timer has elapsed If set to 000 no overflow will take place GROUP TRANSFER This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred to the group will ring at the group before recalling If set to 000 no recall will take place Page 2 190 NEXT PORT This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVERFLOW feat
106. to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 824 Page 2 364 Display shows Dial the entry number OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter digit string max 8digits and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter the minimum number of user dialled digits OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter the waiting number of dial until LCR is operated OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 1 IS 01 52 01 52 01 52 01 52 DISPLAY 601 gt 0 00 MB N 601 gt 0 00 MB N 601 60201 0 MAX 00 MB N 601 gt 60201 3 00 601 gt 60201 3 06 MB N SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 6 Enter YES NO to assign Mail Box for remote 01 601 60201 extension automatically 52 3 MAX 06 MB N OR Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor 7 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 365 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION
107. to return to step 2 EMBER 3 362 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit Es Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 198 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual phone With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to use speed dial The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned A library of up to 2500 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed The system list can have up to 500 numbers and each station can have up to 50 numbers Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of ten Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER Used to exit programming ACTION l Press Transfer button and enter 606 Display shows Press Right Soft button to advance next line OR You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume button and press Right Soft button to advance curs
108. to ring calls to VM AA port or group ring with Trunk line ringing cadence not intercom ring cadence SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming EXAMPLES OF VM AA OPERATION IN BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING In the following example all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated X the separator digit all default values are used in these examples and is not used A DIL 701 calls a VM AA port or group 70UJ 19 In the above example if Trunk Line information is not used HL HL IH Nothing is used DIL 701 calls a call forwarded station 205 4 1420514 X 701 In the above example if forward information is not used 1802051 X 701 In the above example if forward and DN2 Trunk Line information 15 not used 1920519 1 DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM AA 2 H 501 H x H 701 In the above example if overflow information is turned off HL PI Nothing is sent A DID call rings the VM AA directly B H9999H I 1 9999 are the DID digits from Trunk Line In the above example if did information is turned off 1199998 FE 1 A station transfers blind or screened a call Trunk Line DID or intercom to VM AA group or port When the transferring station hangs up blind transfer Nothing is sent A station 202 transfers a Trunk Line call 702 to a station 225 that is Call
109. type it will appear in room status and check in features as a non smoking room 3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting room stations will have the same attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists 4 ADMINISTRATOR Only stations designated as administrator stations can use the hotel motel features such as check in etc 5 FAX STATION When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned to pair station of GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO SMOKING ROOM in MMC 223 e This MMC is available for Hotel Motel enabled only PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME KEYPAD U U sed to scroll through options sed to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER HOLD ANS RLS Page 2 70 U U U sed to advance next MMC sed to clear previous entry sed to select ALL SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 221 201 PHONE USE Display shows NORMAL STATION 2 Dial station number e g 214 214 PHONE USE OR NORMAL STATION Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 to 5 to select station type 214 PHONE USE OR GUEST NO SMOKING Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button 4
110. will ring at a station before recalling the operator AUTO REDIAL INT 30 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station AUTO REDIAL RLS 45 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically cancelled SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 163 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 RANGE TIMER NAME DEFAULT DESCRIPTION UNIT BOOTH TIME OUT 5 0 250 MIN This timer controls the temporary booth phone in hotel motel If the Administrator changed normal phone to booth phone this timer will be start when this timer expired the call disconnect and the phone change to normal phone automatically CALLBACK NO ANS 30 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer CAMP ON RECALL 30 0 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a camped on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station CID MSG RECEIVE 6 1 25 SEC The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the analog CID trunk CLI DISPLAY TIME 5 1 25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID information remains on the phone s display CO CLEAR TIME 30 0 250 SEC When station hangs up a trunk call the system keep the call during t
111. 0 1000 4000 CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS g All times are in milliseconds NOTE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 176 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings Ring Plans provide six separate ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day The start time within a plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan A RPO Ring Plan Override key is not needed as the system will switch automatically however it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1 The ring plans correlate with all MMC s that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS Use the following example of assigning Ring Plans RING PLAN START TIME END TIME MON 1 ST 0000 END 23 59 MON 2 ST 0800 END 2200 MON 3 ST 1000 END 2000 MON 4 ST 1200 END 1800 MON 5 ST 1300 END 1600 MON 6 ST 1400 END 1500 Using 24 hour clock in the example above notice that the END time is within the same 24 hour period The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until the end time which is 23 59 Monday st
112. 0 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC 840 IP SET INFOMATION MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY 3801 IP ADDRESS 219 755 3801 ADDRESS 219 T s dl dl 3801 IP ADDRESS i 9 219 T6 OIL 3801 IP ADDRESS LEGS dig 100 Page 2 375 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol IP address to the VoIP gateway This MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes TABLE 00 62 Outbound or Inbound table use for specific access codes Usually when the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway the Outbound table is used The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call Each table has 63 entries 00 62 0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed this directs a call based on the routing tables used An access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing Amaximum of 8 digits are available 1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to make up the whole access code 2 DEL LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of
113. 00 This MMC provides various VoIP support options The options set in this MMC are set system wide 00 GATEWAY CALL ID This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies this system Default is 1234 01 H 323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H 323 Fast Start call setup method Default is ENABLE 02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification type There are 3 possible selections 0 GWID Which shows the gateway call ID 1 ANI Which shows the calling station number Default 2 IP Which shows the calling H 323 gateway IP address 06 TUNNELING Enables or disables the need for additional channels using H 245 signalling Tunnelling allows use of the H 245 signal channel with the Q 931 channel Default is ENABLE 07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct in line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call Default is 500 11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation when the MGI is used as a H 323 gateway Default is ON 14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H 323 signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment The common and default IP path or port used is 10000 17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER MMC323 which provides calling party identification when using the MGI as a H 323 gateway This provides station ID of the calling station A
114. 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN connected device The eight types of data listed below can be displayed using the LAN printer 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 SMDR UCD REPORT TRAFFIC REPORT ALARM REPORT UCD VIEW PERIODIC UCD HOTEL REPORT PMS The items that are set in this program are listed below OPTIONS DEFAULT DESCRIPION 00 DATA TYPE Type of data to be displayed 01 CURR STATUS OFF Current status of the LAN printer 02 EMPTY BUFF NO Prints all data left in the buffer 03 UPDATE LAN NO Applies modified items 04 DESTINATION OFF Data transmit destination Off Printer PC Both 05 PRINTER IP 200 1 1 1 The IP address of the LAN printer 06 PRINTER TCP 10010 The TCP port of the printer 07 LAN TCP 10020 LAN TCP port 08 RETRY COUNT 03 Re transmit attempt count 00 10 09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec Wait time for re transmit 005 250 sec 10 PJL ENABLE FALSE Sets PJL 0 FALSE 1 TRUE 11 LANGUAGE RAW Printer language 0 RAW 1 PCL 2 PS 12 PAPER SIZE A4 Paper size 0 A4 1 LETTER 13 FONT TYPE COURIER Font type 0 COURIER 1 TIMES NEW ROMAN 14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex 0 FALSE 1 TRUE 15 ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Orientation O PORTRAIT 1 LANDSCAPE 16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT Printer tray 0 Default 1 Tray1 2 2 3 Manual 17 RESOLUTION 300 Resolution 0 300 1 600 18 LINE PAGE 60 Line p
115. 1 2 Select PBX SPECIAL CODE TOLL TOLL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE or OVRD USE TRK GRP 1 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Page 2 232 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 3 Enterindex number e g 3 TOLL OVERRIDE OR S5 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter via dial keypad the desired access TOLL OVERRIDE feature code e g 911 3 911 Press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 3 and enter more entries 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 401 PBX TRUNK MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 305 FORCED CODES TOLL RESTRICTION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 233 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR TIME TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE There is a maximum 2000 with a digit string length of 10 numerical digits This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order The characters and are also accepted for use with feature codes PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPA
116. 1 Press Transfer button and enter 424 8701 S0 MAPPING Display shows first terminal number NONE 2 Dial terminal number 18704150 MAPPING OR NONE Press Volume button to make selection of terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Dial BRI port number 18704150 MAPPING OR 712 Use Volume button to scroll through ports Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 BRI OPTION MMC 423 S T MODE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 149 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS Allows the system administrator or technician to activate analog loop trunk Caller ID on a per trunk basis Activating Caller ID will delay the incoming ring indication at the operator by two ring cycles to allow for the collection of the calling party data Each trunk has the following options 0 NORMAL This is not a Caller ID trunk 1 CID TRUNK This is a Caller ID trunk Supports Bellcore type data only for Caller ID others type will not supports Available in Australia Israel and Italy only PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 4
117. 2 Enter the number of a station 202 TMSG STN OR NOT USED 100 FREE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Specify whether text message will be used or 202 TMSG STN not USED 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit the program OR Press Speaker button to move on to the next program DEFAULT DATA ITP 5012L sets are automatically set to USED RELATED ITEMS MMC 117 TEXT MESSAGE Page 2 208 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE This program allows a station to use the Group conference call feature Up to 100 stations can be allowed in the system Each user can have up to 5 pre programmed conferences PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER To exit programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 612 201 CONF STN Display shows NOT USED 100 FREE 2 Enter the number of a station 202 CONF STN OR NOT USED 100 FREE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Specify whether a group conference be used 205 CONF STN or not USED 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit the program OR Press Speaker button to move on to the next
118. 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 417 E1 PRI CRC4 OPTION This option is used to enable disable CRC4 generation and checking It is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30 framing By default the CRC option is ON After changing this option MMC 418 must be used to restart the card to make the change effective PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 417 701 E1 PRI CRC Display shows ON 2 Enter first trunk number in PRI card e g 701 701 El PRI CRC OR ON Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF 701 E1 PRI CRC OR OFF Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA CRC4 ON RELATED ITEMS MMC 418 CARD RESTART Page 2 136 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This MMC is used to restart a BRI and a PRI card at the card level This action is required to update the processor on the BRI and PRI card to any changes in the card setup and to put these changes into effect PROGRAM
119. 2 TAKE A MESSAGE 03 ASK THEM TO HOLD 04 SEND TO MY VM 05 TRANSFER TO MY SECY 06 LEAVE A MESSAGE 07 PAGE ME 08 OUT OF TOWN 09 INAMEETING 10 IWILL CALL BACK RELATED ITEMS MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 245 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 716 UK LCR OPTIONS This MMC provides U K LCR options as described below 0 NETWORK CODE This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network This table contains up to 16 entries Each code has 4 digits maximum in length and use option for None CCC PIN or Both Default all codes are empty and all use options are none 0 NONE This code doesn t use 1 This code uses with Call Cast Code CCC 2 PIN This code uses with PIN Code 3 BOTH This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code 1 PIN CODE This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary network This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10 digits maximum in length Default all tables are empty 2 This is used to which number used for Cost Code Default Station Number 0 STATION NUMBER Station number uses for Call Cost Code 1 NONE Doesn t use Call Cost Code 3 STATION PIN NO This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number Default all stations are 1 e This MMC is available in Austr
120. 2 276 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table no CID will be displayed The translation table consists of 1000 entries for a M system and 2000 for a L system Each entry is comprised of a ten digit 14 digits allowed telephone number and a 16 digit name Names are written using the keypad Each press of a key will select a character Pressing the next key will move the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the VOL Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 gt 0 gt gt DIAL 1 Space DIAL 2 DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 XIE 0 lt lt Or 2 DIAL 9 DIAL 1
121. 2 387 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 12 GEN NO RESP TIME Before sending Cancel for General Request the User Agent shall wait for this amount of time The range is 0 99900ms Default is 5000ms 13 REQ RETRY TIME After sending General Request the User Agent shall wait for the Final Response for this amount of time The range is 0 99900ms Default is 5000ms 14 SIP SERVER ENBLE Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional external industry standard SIP Server Default is DISABLE 15 SIP SERVER IP Sets SIP server IP address Default is 0 0 0 0 16 SIP SERVER PORT Sets the port to use on the SIP Server Default is 5060 14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for SIP signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment The common and default IP path or port used is 10000 18 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND NUMBER MMC323 which provides calling party identification when using the MGI as a SIP gateway This provides station ID of the calling station A single digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC323 should be entered here This is only used when 405 value is null Default is1 19 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is used as a SIP gateway 0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING Follows 406 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS Follows MMC714 default 2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT Follows MMC724 20 ALLOW GW CHE
122. 2 from the top right column is numbered 13 24 from the top 12B LCD phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1 12 from top to bottom By default Button 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons CALL buttons flash for incoming calls Button 24 24B LCD phone or button 12 12B LCD phone is set as MSG button The MSG button flashes to indicate message waiting Page 1 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming 2 2 e ANS RLS Answer and release calls HOLD Hold Calls MEMORY Speed dialing button REDIAL Last number redial TRSF Transfer current call or enter MMC programming mode SPEKER Switch on speakerphone DS 4000 Series phones The following figure shows the shape of DS 4028E phone among DS 4000 series phones LCD Display Left Soft Button Right Soft Button Dial Buttons Transfer Button T Speaker Button ANS RLS Button Volume Buttons Hold Button Figure 1 1 DS 4028E Phone Among 3 Soft buttons the first one is called the Left Soft button which is used to save the modified data or to move the cursor inside the LCD display in the left direction Among 3 Soft buttons the third one is called the Right Soft button which is used to save the modified data or to move the cursor in the right direction Among 8 programmable buttons the first 6 programmable buttons are assigned as A F to carry out spec
123. 23 NETWORK COS 01 Display shows 01 CALL OFFER Y 2 Dial the class of service number 01 30 NETWORK COS 02 OR 01 CALL OFFER Y Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial the feature number NETWORK COS 02 OR 03 CC PATH RSV Y Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter 0 for NO or 1 for YES NETWORK COS 01 OR 03 CC PATH RSV N Press Volume button to select YES or NO and Press Right Soft button to store data 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 363 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Assigns the digit translation table used for networking Generally under networking condition you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension It s not convenient In this MMC the system provides the easy digit translation of NETWORK LCR DIAL number The translated digits are works like as LCR plus translated digits Using this MMC you only dial the another node extension number and call the another node extension simply The system provides 96 entry of network dial translation PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used
124. 25 701 CID TRUNK Display shows NORMAL 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 CID TRUNK OR NORMAL Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL CID TRUNK Press ANS RLS button to select ALL 3 Dial 0 1 or 2 to change options 705 CID TRUNK OR CID TRUNK Press Volume button to select an option and 705 CID TRUNK press Right Soft button to return to step 2 CID TRUNK Page 2 150 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS ARE NORMAL RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 151 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per trunk basis There are two adjustments available in this MMC is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station RX is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk See the Trunk Gain Setting Tables for level option definitions PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 426 701 TRK GAIN Display
125. 3 Dial a branch group number 01 99 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 102 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DISPLAY 201 BRANCH G BRANCH GRP NONE 205 BRANCH BRANCH GRP NON RP n RP ALL BRANCH GRP BRANCH GRP 205 BRANCH GRP BRANCH GRP 10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 320 PRESET FWD NO ANSWER Allows a technician to assign a default destination for FNA to each station on the system These destinations may be different for each station or they may be the same The preset destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters different FNA destination If you cancel the new destination the preset destination will once more be in effect Preset Forward No Answer time follows the station no answer forward timer Preset forward no answer can be assigned respectively for each type of call 0 INT Preset forward no answer applies only to intercom call 1 EXT Preset forward no answer applies only to incoming call 2 BOTH Preset forward no answer applies to both intercom and incoming call If MMC 210 PRE FWD BUSY sets ON the forward busy follows this feature
126. 3 4 5 DIAL O lt gt 0 DIAL 1 Space j 1 DIAL 2 A B C 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K 5 DIAL 6 M N 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V 8 DIAL 9 X Y Z 9 DIAL 1 The button can be used for the following special characters space amp p 3 2 29 5 Ts lt 25 ae ES ds p 2 gt 2 and Page 2 228 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry TRANSFER Used to exit MMC ANS RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728 CID translation table ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 706 SYS SPEED NAME Display shows 500 2 Dial system speed entry number e g 505 SYS SPEED NAME OR 505 Press Volume button to select entry number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter name using dial keypad and above table SYS SPEED NAME and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 505 TELECOMS OR Press the F key to toggle to speed dial number SYS SPEED DIAL to return to MMC 705 step 3 5058 4 If you want to save speed dial number and SYS SPEED NAME name data to the MMC 728 CLI translation ADD CLI X
127. 325 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 761 TAX RATE SETUP This MMC allows the technician to set up the 8 tax rates used in MMC 760 Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost In addition a 10 character name may be used to define the reason for the tax The Various options are further detailed below TAX RATE This is the number assigned to this tax rate The tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the rate field in MMC 760 counting from left to right TYPE This is the type of tax and defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage of the cost of an item or is added as a fixed dollar value to an item or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage l of the cost of an item VALUE This is the actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost NAME This is a 10 character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax a Available in Hotel Motel enabled only NOTE Names for the items are written using the keypad Each press of a key will select a character Pressing the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the A button will change the letter fro
128. 333 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page XIII Table of Contents OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 803 ASSIGN TENANT 2 334 804 SYSTEM 2 2 24 4 1 lt 11 2 335 805 LEVEL AND GAIN inssnnrsesacnaancenensannentaciatee anne ra Era Eea Ee E NEEE Rani 2 338 806 CARD PRE INSTALL esses 2 341 807 PHONE VOLUME 2 343 809 SYSTEM MMC SANGUAGE 2 346 810 HALT PROCESSING esses 2 347 811 RESET SYSTEM 2 348 812 SET COUNTRY 2 350 813 HOTEL 2 351 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY 2 352 816 CONFERENCE 2 354 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD se 2 356 819 SMART MEDIA FILE 2 1 1 2 357 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID esses 2 358 821 ASSIGN NETWORK 2 359 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION
129. 420 PRI OPTIONS MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC 834 VOIP H 323 OPTIONS MMC 837 VOIP SIP OPTIONS Page 2 106 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK Assigns several options listed below on a per trunk basis OPTIONS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 1A2 EMULATION OFF When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations can participate in a conversation on this trunk by pressing the trunk key 1 TRUNK INC DND OFF When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed to ring a specific station a private line or DIL will ring at that station if the station is in DND 2 TRUNK FORWARD ON When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a ringing stations call forwarding 2 LCR ALLOW OFF When this option is set to ON if the station access this trunk will re route LCR outgoing This feature available in Australia New Zealand Italy and U K only 4 MOH BGM USE OFF When this option is set to ON this trunk uses MOH source This feature available Australia s 8TRK 7TRK only 6 EFWD EXTCLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the external forwarded outgoing call Station or Received CLI from Trunk 7 REPEAT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the trunk to trunk call Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through
130. 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 300 201 CUS ON OFF Display shows ACCESS DIAL 0N 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CUS ON OFF ACCESS DIAL ON OR Press Volume button to select station OR Press ANS RLS button for all and press RIGHT ALL cus oN orFrF Soft button to move cursor ACCESS DIAL ON 3 Press Volume button to select feature and press ALL CUS ON OFF Right Soft button to move cursor ACCESS DIAL ON 4 Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF ALL CUS ON OFF OR ACCESS DIAL Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT Soft button 5 Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 Press Right Soft button to return to step 1 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING Page 2 76 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 301 ASSIGN STATION COS Used to assign class of service to each phone There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701 Assign COS Contents There are 6 ring plans based on the Ring Plan Time in MMC 507 that can ap
131. 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS MNC 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMER MMC 504 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO MNC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MNC 506 TONE CADENCE MNC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MNC 508 CALL COST MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE MMC 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER MMC 514 TONE SOURCE MNC 515 ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE Page 1 10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 2 5 Group Related MMC MMC Program No CHAPTER 1 Before Programming Program Description MNC 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MNC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MNC 602 STATION GROUP NAME MNC 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MNC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MNC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MNC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MNC 607 UCD OPTIONS MNC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MNC 609 CALL LOG BLOCK MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP MMC 615 MGI GROUP MNC 616 MGI USER 4 2 6 Tables Codes AA DECT and VM MMC MMC Program No Program Description MNC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MNC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MNC 706 SYSTEM SPEED D
132. A record gain PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 730 3951 AA GAIN Display shows REC 0 0 PL 0 0 2 Dial AA number e g 3959 3959 AA GAIN OR REC 0 0 PL 0 0 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Volume button to select record gain and 3959 AA GAIN press Right Soft button REC 1 9 PL 0 0 4 Press Volume button to select play gain and press 139591 GAIN Right Soft button REC 1 9 PL 0 0 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA 0 dB RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Page 2 279 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 731 AA RAM CLEAR Used for making clear AA RAM on a per AA card basis Through this MMC the system only accepts the first port as a port field and LCD shows its selection This will erase the whole message that has been programmed previously on the selected card PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and
133. AKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select all ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 433 701 Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate CR table numbers 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 OR CR Press Volume button to select trunk and press RIGHT Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button for all 3 Press Volume button to move cursor along the line 701 until the cursor is under the Cost Rate mark e g 2 Enter 1 for YES or O for NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 1 OR 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit DEFAULT DATA DISPLAY 12345678 00000000 12345678 00000000 12345678 01000000 ALL TRUNKS ALL DIAL PLANS NO COST RATE ASSIGNED RELATED ITEMS MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 155 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 434 CONNECTION STATUS This read only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks Display status actually displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station the display will show one of the conference parties and an arrow The technician or system administrator can then display the next parties in the conference If a station or trunk is in an idle state the display will show IDLE If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection
134. AL 2 A DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 DIAL 9 DIAL 3 4 2 o HN BR lt lt o The button can be used for the following special characters space amp M 3 A 2 5 7 lt A 5 9 IP Q n 12 gt 2 and Page 2 30 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 116 201 ALM REM 1 Display shows HHMM gt NOTSET 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 ALM REM 1 OR HHMM SNOTSET Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL ALM REM 1 Press ANS RLS button to select all stations HHMM NOTSET 3 Dial 1 3 to select alarm e g 2 205 ALM REM 2 OR HHMM SNOTSET Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter alarm time in 24 hour clock format 205 ALM REM 2 e g 1300 for 1pm HHMM 13002 NOTSET Display will automatically advance to step 5 5
135. AND which is a Samsung proprietary method 14 TOS FIELD An eight bit binary value that will be utilized by external routers switches etc that optionally support TOS bit prioritization to identify the transport priority value of data packets generated by the MGI card This value can be left at default value 00000 if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management Default is all bits O 15 FAX RETRY This option selects retry count of Fax over IP in the case that errors are detected The range is 0 4 and 0 means retry Default is 3 2 and parameters are followed 0 AUDIO CODEC Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used MGI2 supports G 729A 8K and G 711 64K MGI1 supports G 711 only Default is G 729A MGI2 ECHO CANCEL This function removes echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay This sets ENABLE only cannot changed SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call and conserves bandwidth when enabled Default is DISABLE FRAME COUNT This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card The range is 20 80ms for MGI2 and 20 50ms MGI1 Default is 20ms MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment The range is 020 300ms Default is 30ms
136. ARK NONEO FEAT NUMBER PLAN PARK 63 FEAT NUMBER PLAN PARK NONE 63 SAME DIAL EXIST CHANGE Y 1 N 0 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 725 SMDR OPTIONS CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report The following options may be selected to print on SMDR OPTIONS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 00 PAGE HEADER YES This option determines whether a page header will print at the top of each page This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine 01 LINE PER PAGE 60 This option selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header The number of lines may be in the range 01 99 02 INCOMING CALL NO This option determines whether incoming calls will print on SMDR 03 OUTGOING CALL YES This option determines whether outgoing calls will print on SMDR 04 AUTHORIZE NO This option determines whether authorization codes will CODE print on SMDR If this option is set to NO system make AUTH field to on SMDR 05 SMDR START YES This option determines whether valid calls will include the TIME minimum call time in total call duration 06 IN OUT GROUP NO This option allows a message IN GROUP or OUT GROUP to be printed in the digits dialled column each time a station enters or leaves a gr
137. BRI STATION ISDN terminal number 5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number 6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H 323 trunk number 7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number 8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking If during any test procedures you need to run the system with a default database and power up with this MMC option set to YES the Built In Voice Mail database will be NOTE overwritten according to the data in MMC 751 and the default numbering plan If you plan this type of test remove Built In Voice Mail Card until the procedure is finished and the customer database is reloaded PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Changes MMC data between YES and NO KEYPAD 0 and will change data and advance to other option SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC Page 2 310 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 750 Display shows 2 Dial 0 1 or 2 to set option and advance OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Dial O No or Yes to confirm selection OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL OPTIONS ARE NO RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY VM CARD RESTART DOWNLOAD NO VM CARD RESTART CARD RESTART NO VM CARD RESTAR
138. BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 743 DBS Display shows STS 2 Select the BSI card via dial button pad DBS OR STS Press Volume button to make selection The status of each DBS is displayed If the status is good 1 15 displayed If the status 15 not good 0 15 displayed 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 12345678 5 1 00000000 12345678 S 2 00000000 Page 2 303 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF Allows DECT handset registration to be enabled on a system If this MMC is not opened and an attempt is made to register a DECT handset an error message will be displayed The default passcode can be changed using MMC 202 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button a
139. BX UK EM USER ROM RUSSIA E D 1 0 USER ROM AR WINK ARGENTINA E D MO WINK DID AR WINK MPD ARGENTINA E D MO WINK MPD CHINA NO1 CHINA E D I O NO 1 OF CHINA POL WINK MPD POLAND E D POLAND WINK MPD UNUSE Page 2 126 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 411 Display shows Enter desired trunk number e g 705 OR Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks Press Volume button to trunk type select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Volume button to signalling select and press Right Soft button to Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS TRUNK PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY 701 1 SIGNAL UNUSE 705 El SIGNAL UNUSE ALL 1 SIGNAL B 305 Ud o SIGNAL E amp M IMMEDIATE 705 1 SIGNAL E amp M ITU WINK Page 2 127 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Allows for the assignment of analog DID or E amp M c
140. CK When using a gatekeeper this permits the SIP gateway to check for gatekeeper presence Default is DISABLE PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Page 2 388 Used to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 834 Display shows first option 128 2 Enter SIP option number 00 20 via dial keypad OR ANI Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter SIP option data via dial keypad CAL OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MC 323 MC 405 MC 306 MC 714 MC 724 MC 832 MC 834 SSSS8 S855 CALLING PARTY NUMBER CO LINE TEL NUMBER TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION DIAL NUMBERING PLAN VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS H 323 OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY EWAY CALL ID 4 TESTS TID ENCES 2 389 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 840 IP PHONE INFOMATION This MMC provides a means to register the IP phones with the Office
141. CT 47 ACCOUNT ALMCLR 57 ALARM AUTH AUTHORIZATION CODE BARGE NONE BARGE IN BILL NONE BILL Related to Hotel Motel Features BLOCK NONE OHVA BLOCK BOSS NONE BOSS SECRETARY CAMP 45 STATION CAMP ON CANMG 42 MESSAGE CANCEL CBK 44 CALLBACK CHIN NONE CHECK IN Related to Hotel Motel Features CHOUT NONE CHECK OUT Related to Hotel Motel Features CHOICE NONE CHOICE Related to News Server CONF 46 CONFERENCE CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY CR NONE CALL RECORD Requires SVMi CREDIT NONE CREDIT Related to Hotel Motel Features DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION DICT NONE DICTATION DIR NONE DIRECTORY DIRPK 65 DIRECT PICKUP DISALM 58 DISAALARM CLEAR DIVERT NONE EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY DLOCK 13 DOOR UNLOCK DND 40 DO NOT DISTURB DNDO NONE DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE FAUTO 14 FORCED AUTO ANSWER FLASH 49 FLASH FWD 60 CALL FORWARD GCONF NONE GROUP CONFERENCE GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 263 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 FEATURE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION HDSET NONE HEADSET MODE HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP HOLD 11 HOLD HOTEL NONE HOTEL Related to Hotel Motel Features IG NONE IN OUT GROUP INFDSP NONE INFORMATION DISPLAY Requires News Call Plus LCR NONE LEAST COST ROUTING LISTN NONE GROUP LISTENING LNR 19 LAST NUMBER REDIAL LOG NONE CALL LOGGING MCID N
142. D RESTART MMC 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX 752 AUTO 753 WARNING DESTINATION MMC 754 VM HALT SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 MMC Program No CHAPTER 1 Before Programming Program Description MMC 755 VM ALARM MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH MMC 757 VM IN OUT MMC 758 VM DAY NIGHT MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE 4 3 Technician Level Programming MMC Program No Program Description MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MNC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MNC 803 ASSIGN TENANT GROUP MNC 804 SYSTEM I O PARAMETER MMC 805 LEVEL AND GAIN MMC 806 CARD PRE INSTALL MMC 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC 809 SYSTEM MMC SANGUAGE MMC 810 HALT PROCESSING MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM MMC 812 SET COUNTRY CODE MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION MMC 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC 816 CONFERENCE GAIN MMC 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC 819 SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION MMC 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 13 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming MMC
143. D Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 710 LCR DIGIT 0001 Display shows DIGIT 2 Dial LCR entry e g 0005 LCR DIGIT 0005 OR DIELES Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and LCR DIGIT 0005 press Right Soft button DIGIT 305426 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 1 4 Enter digit length max 31 LCR DIGIT 0005 Cursor will move to RT route selection LENGTH 10 RT 01 5 Enter RT 01 32 LCR DIGIT 0005 Valid entry will return you to step 1 LENGTH 10 RT 01 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE Page 2 234 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 711 LCR TIME TABLE This table gives the flexibility to the system through the LCR ROUTES to allow calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day There are four possible time entries per day the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period
144. DR record will show programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800 20 HOTEL PAGE END This option determines where the page feed is inserted FEED on HM REPT Hotel Model Enabled Only 21 HOTEL START 0 This option determines that the number of empty lines per LINE each page on HM REPT Hotel Model Enabled Only 23 DID NUM NAME YES If this option is set to YES received DID information will print on SMDR 24 ITP NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show IP based REGISTRATION station to system connect and disconnect 25 SET RELOCATION NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show set relocated information Names are written using the keypad Each press of a key selects a character Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing A button changes the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Right Soft button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 lt gt 0 DIAL 1 Space 1 DIAL 2 A B 0 2 DIAL 3 D E 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 96 5 DIAL 6 M N O 5 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V 8 Page
145. Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type 205 ALM REM e g 2 HHMM 1300 gt DAILY OR Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Enter messages using above table and press Right 1205 ALM REM Soft button to return to step 2 Sam SMITH 7 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALARMS ARE NOTSET RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 31 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text message for any station One station can use up to 10 text messages In MMC 611Text Message Station set USED station only uses this feature In case of a large LCD phone system set to USED automatically Messages are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the message is SAME TIMP press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the bottom left programmable button will change the letter from upper case to lower case NOTE When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up
146. E 2 119 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE 1 1 1 1 4 3 1 eines tnn aene nates a innate santa 2 120 409 TRUNK STATUS READ 2 122 410 ASSIGN 0 2 4 4 dash 2 124 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL 2 126 412 ASSIGN TRUNK 2 2 1111 2 128 413 Ee Rd 2 129 414 PRS SIGNAL riore cii eia a din iin 2 130 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA 2 132 416 ASSIGN amp M DID RINGDOWN 2 134 417 ET IPRICRCA OPTION 5 crinem renun tna nn tak nhau nadar ek aue du c a dark d aac nagd dn gag uaa 2 136 418 BRI AND PRI CARD 2 137 419 BRIOPTIONS m M H 2 138 420 PRI OPTIONS 22002000 2 142 421 MSN DIGIT e E 2 144 DB i lqeo tiig 2 146 423 os 2 148 424 BRI SO MAPPING 2 149 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID 2 150 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL 2 152 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE
147. E ETWORK CODE NONE 1 1234 USE NONE ETWORK CODE wise cee n Page 2 247 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 717 UCD AGENT ID This MMC defines UCD agent ID number or PIN numbers These numbers are used to log UCD agents into the UCD groups There are 300 available entries on L system and 100 available entries on M system Each entry is tied to a specific UCD group Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Moves cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 717 AGENT PIN 001 Display shows ID GRP NONE 2 Dial code index number e g 005 AGENT PIN 005 OR ID GRP NONE Press Volume buttons to select index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter ID code via dial keypad e g 1234 and AGENT PIN 005 press Right Soft button to move cursor ID 1234 GRP NONE 4 Enter group number e g 505 AGENT PIN 005 OR ID 1234 GRP 505 Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2 OR Press ANS RLS button for all 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 607
148. E System will not authenticate IP based phones at all 1 PSWD This is a system wide password value used for registration of IP phones Default is 1234 3 EASYSET OPTION Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system 0 PSWD This is a system wide password value used for authentication of EasySet server Default is 1234 1 ALIVE TIME This is a EasySet link via LAN alive check timer Default is 0 SEC 4 CTI LINK OPTION Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system 0 REPORT Sets YES or NO for SMDR data to CTI link via LAN Default is NO 1 UCD REPORT Sets YES or NO for UCD data to CTI link via LAN Default is NO 2 ALIVE TIME This is a CTI link via LAN alive check timer If this sets 0 the system will not check link alive Default is 300 SEC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 393 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 5 ITP DSP PARA OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Sets IP phone DSP parameter of system wide 0 FRAME CNT This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone This data uses DOWN SYS DATA case only on this MMC The range is 10 40ms Default is 10ms 1 JITTER BUF Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment This data uses DOWN SYS DATA case only on this MMC The range is 10 90ms Default is 20ms 2 TOS eight bit binary value that will be utilized by external routers switches etc that optionally suppor
149. E 3 OR MEMBER 05 205 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO STATIONS ASSIGNED RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 197 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed The OfficeServ 500 system must be equipped with a MISC daughter board to allow external paging PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 605 EXT PAGE ZONE 5 Display shows first page zone MEMBER 1 NONE 2 Dial page zone number e g 6 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 OR EMBER 1 NONE Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Dial member number e g 3 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 OR MEMBER 3 NONE Use Volume button to select member numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 above 4 Dial relay number via dial keypad e g 362 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 and press Right Soft button
150. ELETE FILE NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to delete file and move cursor step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 357 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking Up to 50 link Ids can be entered including SELF ID In addition each Link ID is also associated with the IP address of the 2 card for that system and IP address type LINK ID System ID for networking feature SIGNAL G W System IP address for VoIP networking IP TYPE System IP address type for VoIP networking SELF system IP address type determines SYSTEM IP TYPE on MMC 830 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to delete an entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 820 SYSTEM LINK ID Display shows SELF 2 Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and SYSTEM LINK ID press Right Soft button SELF 11 3 Press Volume button to select other link ID SYSTEM LINK ID and press Right Soft button to mover cursor NO 01 4 Enter other link ID via dial keypad and SYSTEM LINK ID press Right Soft button NO 01 22 5 Press Transfer b
151. ENANCE BUSY SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 405 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY This MMC is used to place stations trunks and common resources equipment in a maintenance busy condition This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problem equipment Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called The calling stations display if equipped will show MADE BUSY when called Stations receiving DID or E amp M type calls will receive a DND No more calls tone The station display will still function with station and date When the busy station is accessed it will function like a locked all station Trunks made busy can not originate calls Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination Common resource equipment such as DSP s CID DSP s and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports AA ports or voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS 0 TRK Trunks 1 STN Stations 2 PAGE Page Ports 3 AA Auto Attendant card ports 4 DTMFR DTMF Receiver 4 DSP 5 CID CID Receiver 14 DSP 6 R2MFC R2MFC Receiver 8 DSP 7 CONF GRP 01 24 8 MGI MGI ports cases of DTMFR or 2 DSP selection when DSP is not mounted display will show NONE If mounted display will show IDLE by default NOTE PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Scroll through
152. ENY TABLE Provides a way to make toll restriction call barring very easy and flexible There are 500 entries allowed in the deny and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service Each index can have up to 12 digits With the use of wild cards MMC 704 Assign Wild Character more flexibility can be built into toll restriction Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704 There are six toll levels B to G that are programmable Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default and toll level H is set as in house only by default PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME KEYPAD U U sed to scroll through options sed to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Used to wild card X entered B Used to wild card Y entered C Used to wild card Z entered ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 702 DENY 001 BCDEFG Display shows 000000 2 Dial index number e g 005 DENY 005 BCDEFG OR 000000 Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter toll pattern via dial pad e g 212 DENY 005 BCDEFG 2122 000000 Enter wild card e g 21 from above list and DENY 005 BCDEFG press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS ide 000000 options 4 Press Volume button to move cursor along line DENY 001 BCDEFG un
153. F06 Trunk Disconnect Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk External seizure test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 67 7 Trunk Connect Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk External seizure test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 68 SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 69 MNF09 SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 70 MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 71 MNF 11 E1 In Service E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 72 MNF12 SIO Out IO port has lost DTR Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 73 SIO In IO port has regained Alarm Data SIO 1 through 6 74 MNF14 TODC Error Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred 75 MNF15 TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of available time slots Maximum 192 per cabinet Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 76 MNF16 PSU Alarm Indicates there are over 56 ports in a cabinet with a single SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd PSU and more power is required Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Page 2 403 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CODE ALARM NAME DEFINITION 77 MNF17
154. Forward All to a VM AA group or port When the transferring station hangs up blind transfer and the VM AA group or port answers 225 x 702 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 273 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 A station 202 transfers a Trunk Line call 702 to a group 501 that overflows to a VM AA group or port 4 H 501 X 1 17021 In the above example if overflow information is turned off Hl HL PI Nothingis sent A station 205 calls a VM AA port or group Q 1920511 HD In the above example if direct information is turned off Hl PI Nothing is sent A station 205 calls using MESSAGE key Q 0205 41 HF In above example if message information is turned off HL IH Nothing is sent A call 702 recalls back from station 225 to the VM AA group 225 x 702 In the above example if recall and DN2 CO information are turned off HL PI Nothing is sent PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used in some fields where a value is entered or deleted A Used to input alpha character A B Used to insert alpha character C Used to insert alpha character Page 2 274 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button
155. G 15201 25500 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone It is recommended that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 214 Display shows 2 Enter in valid destination number for ring plan e g 217 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter in valid destination number for another ring plan e g 249 OR Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLAN 500 RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY DISA ALARM RING ie SOO 22500 DISA ALARM RING 1 217 2 500 DISA ALARM RING 1 217 2 249 Page 2 63 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS Assigns either two 2 chan
156. H ports and the alarm sensor are changed or assigned Default Internal CHIME 371 Internal MODEM 3999 External MOH 372 377 External PAGE amp Relay 361 369 Common Bell Relay 3991 3993 Loud Bell Relay 3995 3997 04 STNG DIAL NUMBER This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned Default 500 5xx or 5001 5xxx 05 TRKG DIAL NUMBER This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned Default The first is 9 or 0 800 828 06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned Dialling codes are entered via the dial pad key by pressing the dial pad number the required steps to select the feature For example for OHVA the number 6 would be pressed three times NOTE Please remember that this program is system wide 07 50 STN DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports mapping terminal number Default 8701 8748 08 DECT STN DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for DECT terminals Default 8801 8899 09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd This is where additional LCR access codes are entered in the case when two or more OfficeServ 500 system are networked together Default NONE Page 2 261 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 10 VIRT EXT DIAL NO This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or assigned De
157. IAL BY NAME MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE MNC 708 ACCOUNT CODE MNC 709 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 11 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming MMC Program No OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Program Description Page 1 12 MMC 716 UK LCR OPTIONS MMC 717 UCD AGENT ID MMC 718 MY AREA CODE MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS MMC 726 VM AA OPTIONS MMC 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC 730 AA RECORD GAIN MMC 731 RAM CLEAR MMC 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE MMC 733 AA PLAN TABLE MMC 734 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH MMC 735 AA USE TABLE MMC 736 ASSIGN AA MOH MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 740 STATION PAIR MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 743 DBS STATUS 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC 750 VM CAR
158. IAL NAME Allows an 11 character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location This name enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial feature is used The directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial location by viewing its name Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing button will change the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right NOTE COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL lt gt 0 DIAL 1 Space 1 DIAL 2 A B C 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 96 5 DIAL 6 M N O 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V 8 DIAL 9 W X Y 2 9 DIAL s The button be used for the following special characters space amp m 3 7 4 5 7 lt Sih 5 IP Te d i js 3 2 E 2 2 and Page 2 12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programm
159. IO ALARM 0 Used to set the Audio alarm threshold It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 7 UCD CSLEVEL 1 0 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 8 UCD CSLEVEL 2 0 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 161 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 500 Display shows 2 Enter number from above list e g 6 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter in new value via dial keypad If entry is valid system will return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 162 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DISPLAY ALARM REM CNTER 052 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 002 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0002 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 501 SYSTEM TIMERS Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as nece
160. LT NO table Press ANS RLS button and dial 1 for YES The speed dial number must be exist 5 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO NAMES RELATED ITEMS MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC 728 CLIP NAME TRANSLATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 229 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE Enables the authorization feature on a per class of service selection There are 500 available entries Authorization codes can be up to 4 to 10 digits PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 707 Display shows 2 Dial code index number e g 005 OR Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter authorization code minimum of four digits and a maximum of 10 digits via dial keypad e g 1234567890 and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter class of service number 01 30 e g 05 OR Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DA
161. LUME 13 RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE Page 2 28 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all phones There are 20 messages available The first ten are pre programmed and the remaining entries can be customized in MMC 715 Programmed Station Message The last five message are can be modified by each phone user PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 115 201 PGMMSG 00 Display shows CANCEL PGM MSG 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PGMMSG 00 OR CANCEL PGM MSG Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL PGMMSG Press ANS RLS button to select 3 Dial an entry number to select message number 205 PGMMSG 05 e g 05 PAGE ME OR Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO MESSAGES SELECTED RELATED ITEMS MMC 715 PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING SAM
162. Ltd Page 2 361 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Assigns the class of service for networking OPTIONS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 01 CALL OFFER Y Call Offer 03 CC PATH RSV Y CC Path Reservation 04 CC SIG CONN Y CC Retention of Signal Connection 05 CC SVC RETN Y CC Service Retention 06 CCBS N Call Completion to Busy Subscriber 07 CCNR N Call Completion on No Reply 08 CFB Y Call Forward Busy 09 CFNR Y Call Forward No Reply 10 CFU Y Call Forward Unconditional 11 Cl N Call Intrusion 12 CI CAPABIL 2 Intrusion Capability Level 1 3 14 CI PROTECT 2 Intrusion Protection 0 3 23 CONPLEVEL 3 CONP Level 0 none 1 Alert 2 Busy 3 Both 26 CT RE ROUTE N Transfer By Rerouting 27 N DND Announcement 28 DNDO Y Do Not Disturb Override 29 DNDO CAPABL 2 DNDO Capability Level 0 3 30 DNDO PROTEC 2 DNDO Protection Level 1 3 31 PATH REPL Y Path Replacement 32 PATH RETEN N Path Retention PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry Page 2 362 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 8
163. MC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 506 BUSY TONE Display shows INTERRUPT TONE 2 Dial tone number from above list 00 13 e g 09 TRANSFERER TONE OR INTERRUPT TONE Press Volume button to select tone press Left Soft button and advance to step 3 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 175 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for TRANSFERER TONE INTERRUPT INTERRUPT TONE OR Press Volume button to select tone control and press Right Soft button to advance step 4 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 4 Dialnew value for interrupt times TRANSFERER TONE 0100 must be four digits 9900 0100 9900 Press Right Soft button advances cursor Press Left Soft button retreats cursor If valid entry system returns to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA TONE ON OFF ON OFF BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350 CONFIRM BARGE IN 250 250 250 1250 DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS DND NO MORE TONE 250 250 250 250 ERROR TONE 200 200 200 200 HOLD CAMP ON TONE 500 3500 500 3500 MESSAGE WAIT TONE 1000 250 1000 250 RING BACK TONE 1000 4000 1000 4000 RING TONE 1000 2000 1000 2000 TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100 DID RING BACK TONE 1000 2000 1000 2000 CO BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350 CO RING BACK TONE 1000 400
164. N N N N NN N N N Ds 28B N N N N N Y Y DS48BB N N N N N Y Y N N NN No NN DS B N N N N N N N Y N NN N JN ION 0520 N N N N N N N Y Y 05 140 N N N N N N N N Y Y N N DSAL N N N N N NN Y N NIN IPOSTD N N N N N N N N N NN Y Y N IPAD N N N N N N N N N N NN Y Y JON IPHOL N N N N N N N N N N NN NN Y PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 315 SET RELOCATION Display shows EXT EXT 2 Enter first station number e g 202 SET RELOCATION press Right Soft button to move cursor EXT202 EXT 3 Enter second station number e g 210 SET RELOCATE Press Right Soft button to enter data EXT202 EXT210 4 Display will return to STEP 1 SET RELOCATION Go to STEP 2 muro mu OR SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 95 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 96 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 316 CO
165. N PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE Display shows AUTH CODE FFFF 2 Dial 0 for AUTH code or 1 for system ID DECT SYSTEM CODE OR AUTH CODE FFFF Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 295 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Ifoption is AUTH code enter AUTH CODE via dial keypad e g 1234 If option is system ID enter system ID via dial keypad e g 567 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA AUTH CODE FFFF SYSTEM ID 000 RELATED ITEMS MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 743 DBS STATUS MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER Page 2 296 DECT SYSTEM CODE D UTH CODE 1234 DECT SYSTEM COD ET SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Used for deleting previously registered information of DECT handsets This MMC has two modes FORCED mode When this mode is programmed the system clears the registered infor
166. N MOH Press ANS RLS button to select all stations MOH SOURCE 3 Enter source number e g 371 205 STN MOH OR MOH SOURCE 371 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 89 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button and enter to exit 4 OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA TONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC 736 ASSIGN AA MOH MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH Page 2 90 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per station basis There are eight classes which may be assigned LCR class of service allows specific users to trunk advance up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME U KEYPAD U sed to scroll through options sed to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 310 201 LCR CLASS Display shows LCR CLASS 1 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 LCR CLASS OR LCR CLASS 1 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR TOR Chass Press ANS RLS button to select A
167. NG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS 001 ALL TRUNKS 301 RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 316 COPY STATION TRUNK USE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 211 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 615 MGI GROUP This optional program sets designated MGI ports for specific services This allows grading of MGI card s for traffic conditions The MGI ports can be segregated into groups Keep in mind that any entries made here can be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC616 0 LOCAL ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a private IP network 1 PUB IP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public IP network 2 VOIP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 500 systems across a private IP network 3 PUB IP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 500 systems on a public IP network 4 VOIP TRUNK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry standard H 323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network 5 PUB IP TRK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry standard
168. NG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 47 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE Used to change the passcodes for the following features 0 RING PLAN This is the passcode required to place the system in different ring plans RP or change the ring time override RTO 1 DISA ALARM This is the passcode required to clear a DISAALARM generated when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded 2 ALARM CLR This is the passcode required to clear a ALARM generated by the disconnection of BI PMS SIO Available in Hotel Motel enabled only 3 AA RECORD This is the passcode required to record prompts for use with the AA ports on the Auto Attendant card 4 DECT REGST This is the passcode required to registration of DECT phone 5 DELETE This passcode is used to allow a change to be deleted from a room bill 6 WLI REGST This is the passcode required to registration of WIP phone a The passcode is four digits long Each digit can be 0 9 BUTTONS Used to enter passcodes SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 202 CHANGE PASSCODE Display shows RING PLAN 0000 2 Press Volume button to make selection Press CHANGE PASSCODE Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry RECORD 4321 3 Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad CHANGE PASSCODE AA RECORD 9999
169. NS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 113 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 404 701 TRUNK NAME Display shows 2 Dial trunk e g 704 704 TRUNK NAME OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter trunk name using the procedure 704 TRUNK NAME described above Press Right Soft button to TELECOMS return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 405 TRUNK NUMBER Page 2 114 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER Allows an 11 digit number to be entered to identify an individual trunk Numbers are written using the keypad Each press of a key selects a digit Pressing the desired key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory number is 426 4100 press the number 4 once to get the number 4 Now press the number 2 once for number 2 Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your number When the number you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous number press the
170. OCK MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 705 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 417 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 890 INITIALISE PORT This program allows you to initialise items related to call process or DB for specific station or Trunk line This will return the port to default condition PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through system alarms KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Enter leave option SPEAKER Used to store data and move to next MMC TRANSFER Enter exit MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 890 201 CALL CLEAR Display shows ARE YOU SURE NO 2 Enter the station or Trunk line 202 CALL CLEAR OR ARE YOU SURE NO Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialise port 202 DB INITIAL OR ARE YOU SURE NO Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR ARE YOU SURE YES Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to save and return step 2 IN 02 DB INITIAL 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 418 SAMSUNG Elect
171. ODE level and press Volume button to select MMC SELECT PROG ID OR Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button to enter MMC 5 Press Transfer button to exit SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 45 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA DISABLE RELATED ITEMS MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Page 2 46 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer Programming from its current value The passcode is four digits long Each digit can be 0 9 The current old passcode is required for this MMC PROGRAM BUTTONS KEYPAD Used to enter passcodes SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 201 CUST PASSCODE NEW CODE 2 Enter new passcode via dial keypad CUST PASSCODE maximum four digits NEW CODE 3 Verify new passcode via dial keypad CUST PASSCODE VERTENE Passcode verified go to step 4 CUST PASSCODE OR VERIFY SUCCESS Passcode failure Return to step 2 CUST PASSCODE VERIFY FAILURE 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA PASSCODE 1234 RELATED ITEMS MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING SAMSU
172. OG review status will be appeared when LNR button is pressed 49 ISDN KEYFAC OFF When ON if phone user press or during conversation via BRI trunk system send information message instead of digit message 50 Page 2 60 CHK SPV TRK OFF When ON if both trunks don t have supervision feature then cannot make outgoing transfer or unsupervised conference SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OPTIONS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 51 PRE FWD BUSY OFF When ON a call arrives busy station that is not set forward busy if preset no answer destination is available a call re route to that destination immediately PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 210 TEN ON AND OFF Display shows DISA PSWD OFF 2 Dial option number e g 00 TEN ON AND OFF Press Right Soft button to move cursor DISA PSWD OFF 3 Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF TEN ON AND OFF OR DISA PSWD ON Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for other options OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING MOH P
173. OGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 510 1 5 RING 0400 Display shows 0200 0400 3000 2 Dial cadence number from above list e g 3 3 DOOR RING 0400 OR 0100 0400 2000 Press Volume button to select press LEFT Soft button and advance to step 3 3 Dial new value for interrupt times 3 DOOR RING 0100 must be four digits 9900 0100 9900 Press Right Soft button advances cursor Press Left Soft button retreats cursor If valid entry system returns to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 181 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA ON OFF ON OFF STN RING 0400 0200 0400 3000 TRK RING 1000 3000 1000 3000 DOOR RING 0400 0100 0400 2000 ALM RING 0200 0200 0200 2000 CBK RING 0200 0200 0200 4000 el All times are in milliseconds NOTE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 182 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE This MMC defines the cadence flash rate of single line telephone message waiting lamps on phones connected to an MWSLI supported card There are two main choices for the MW lamp cadence avail
174. ONE MALICIOUS CALL ID MMPA 56 MEET ME PAGE ANSWER MMPG 54 MEET ME PAGE MSG 43 MESSAGE MYGRPK NONE MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP NEW NONE NEW CALL NOCLIP NONE NO CID SEND OHVA NONE OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE OPER 0 OPERATOR PAGE 55 PAGE PAGPK 10 PICKUP PAGE HOLD PARK NONE CALL PARK ORBIT PMSG 48 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE PTHR NONE PATH REPLACEMENT RB NONE ROOM BILL Related to Hotel Motel Features REJECT NONE OHVA REJECT RP NONE RING PLAN RSV NONE ROOM STATUS VIEW Related to Hotel Motel Features RTO NONE RING PLAN TIME OVERIDE SELPID NONE SELF SYSTEM ID SETMG 41 SET MESSAGE W O RING SG NONE STATION GROUP SLOCAT NONE STAFF LOCATOR Related to Hotel Motel Features SLTALM EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION SLTMMC 15 NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING Page 2 264 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION 1 Press TRANSFER Display shows 2 Dial option number to make selection e g 06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER OR FEATURE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION SNR 17 SAVED NUMBER REDIAL SPEED 16 SPEED DIAL SRELOC NONE SET RELOCATION STATE NONE SET EXECUTIVE STATE UA NONE UNIVERSAL ANSWER VDIAL 681 VOICE DIAL Requires VDIAL card VMADM NONE VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION Requires SVMi card VMAME NONE ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION Requires SVMi card VMMEMO VOICE MAIL MEMO Requires SVMi card VMMSG NONE VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY Requires SVMi card VM
175. OR YES Call to Operator 37 OUT TRSF YES Outgoing transfer 38 OVERRIDE NO Barge In 39 PAGE 0 YES Page zone 0 Paging 40 PAGE 1 YES Page zone 1 Paging 41 PAGE 2 YES Page zone 2 Paging 42 PAGE 3 YES Page zone 3 Paging 43 PAGE 4 YES Page zone 4 Paging 44 PAGE 5 YES Page zone 5 Paging 45 PAGE 6 YES Page zone 6 Paging 46 PAGE 7 YES Page zone 7 Paging 47 8 YES Page zone 8 PAGING 48 PAGE 9 YES Page zone 9 PAGING 49 PAGE YES Page zone Paging 51 PICKUP YES Call pickup 52 PRB YES Privacy Release and Bridge 53 REM HOLD YES Remote Hold 54 RNG PLAN YES Ring Mode Change 55 SECURE YES Barge In secure 56 SET RLOC NO Set Relocation 57 SSPD TOL YES System Speed dial toll check 58 STN LOCK YES Station Lock 59 SYS SPD YES System Speed dial Page 2 218 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 1 COS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 60 NO Trunk call automatic record SVM 800 61 TRK EHLD YES Trunk call exclusive hold 62 UNCO YES Unsupervised Conference 63 VM AREC NO Auto Record SVMi 64 VM AME NO Answer Machine Emulation SVMi 65 VM REC NO Call Record SVMi 66 VMS PSWD NO VMS password SVM 800 67 VMS REC NO VMS Call Record SVM 800 2 CALL STATION GROUPS STN GROUP 01 80 YES Station group 01 80 calling 3 CALL TRUNK GROUPS TRK GROUP 01 30 YES Trunk group 01 30 calling 4 CALL TO BIVMS 5 5
176. P ADDRESSES MMC 840 IP SET INFO MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming SYSTEM RESTART ARI E YOU SURI E NO Page 2 373 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 831 MGI PARAMETERS This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol IP addressing of the MGI card s This MMC must be utilized MGI card s used on the system 0 IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address for the MGI card 1 GATEWAY Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local subnet 2 SUB MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range if IP devices subnet that are within direct reach of the MGI without having to go through the designated network IP gateway 3 PUBLIC IP The MGI will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address If this IP address sets 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or default value then this MGI card uses private IP only See System IP Type on MMC 830 4 STS PERIOD No entry required Designates the timed message cycle to check the remote IP status of MGI3 S W 5 VERSION No entry required Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S W 6 MAC ADDR For your reference and cannot be changed The unique hardware MAC address of the MGI card 7 CARD
177. PSU Alarm Rec A second PSU has been recognized when added after alarm condition of Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 78 MNF18 SLIFault An card has been detected as out of service internal CODEC test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 79 MNF19 SLI Recovery An SLI card detected as out of service has been detected as recovered and is in service via internal CODEC test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 80 MNF20 PSUB Alarm Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two PSU Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 81 MNF21 DSS Alarm System capacity of 64 button DSS modules has been exceeded 82 MNF26 SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 83 MNF27 SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 84 MNF28 LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data Data Type SMDR 85 MNF29 LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2 Alarm Data Data Type SMDR MNG Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving 86 01 Indicates the Phone is disconnected Disconnect Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 87 MNG02 Phone Connect Indicates the Phone is connected Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 88 MNGO03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates the Extension is Off Hook Alarm time over Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 89 MNG04 On Hook Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension
178. PTION RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 340 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 806 CARD PRE INSTALL Allows the preprogramming of a card slot for a specific board type A board inserted into a system will not be recognized by the system until it is ENABLED using this MMC Cards installed using MMC 806 will NOT be assigned in the system numbering plan You must then use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions trunks AA ports or miscellaneous functions This MMC also shows which PSU is powering the card selected POWER STATUS N 48V Power does not used 1 Power is used 1 Power type PSU 60 2 Power is 2 4 Power type PSU 60 1 1 Power is used 1 Power type PSU B 2 2 Power is used 2 Power type PSU B xx The maximum port count which 48V power 15 supplied If a card is removed and a different type card is inserted and this MMC is performed the memory associated with that card e g key programming etc will be erased PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 806 C l S 1 P 1 16 Display shows 8 DLI 8 DLI 2 Press Volume button to make selection C l 5 1 P 1 16 e g Cabinet 1 and press Right Soft button 8 DLI 8 DLI 3 select wh
179. PY STN TRK USE Provides a tool for duplicating station trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station user group to another This can be done on a per station use group basis or on all station use groups PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 316 001 CPY USABLE Display shows FROM 2 Enter station use group number e g 005 005 CPY USABLE OR FROM NONE Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter station use group number to copy from 005 CPY USABLE Cursor is returned to step 2 FROM 003 OR Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 97 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE This MMC is used to allow or restrict stations from making intercom calls to each other within the same tenant
180. Press ANS RLS button for select all station 3 Enter station number to copy from e g 203 205 COPY KEY and cursor returns to step 2 FROM 203 OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Page 2 252 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Provides a service tool which will minimize the accidental loss of programmable buttons on the phones The method of operation is simple first the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features Once testing or replacement is completed the data can be restored to the individual station providing the same type is in place This program uses carefully Because key programming data save to common key programming database When new phone connect system copy from common key programming database to new phone key programming database PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to adva
181. Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALARMS ARE NOTSET RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 24 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user A memo can be left by entering it via the dial keypad using the table below A memo of up to and including 13 characters can be entered For example using the dial keypad press 6 once to enter the letter and press 3 twice for an Pressing the A button will change the letters from upper case to lower case NOTE WU When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT DIAL 0 DIAL 1 X Space DIAL 2 DIAL 3 DIAL 4 0 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 DIAL 9 44 95 XIE 0 ZX lt lt o o o l xiooc rio m DIAL 1 The button can be used for the following special characters space amp p gt ro 2 23 5 7 lt gt is 5 ie js 5 E and b PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear prev
182. Press Transfer button and enter 858 01 2 01 ACT OFF Display shows POR Restart 2 Enter the alarm entry number 02 MJA02 ACT OFF OR Soft Restart Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter YES or NO 1 0 for alarming 02 MJA02 ACT ON OR Sort SIECLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA All OFF RELATED ITEMS MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS Page 2 412 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY This MMC is only used for system H W EPLD version display This is a READ ONLY MMC OfficeServ 500 L System 00 MCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of MCP2 01 MCP2 B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 1 of MCP2 02 MCP2 B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 2 of MCP2 03 MCP2 B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 3 of MCP2 04 C1 M BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet 1 05 SCP CARD Shows the EPLD version of SCP 06 SCP B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 1 of SCP 07 SCP B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 2 of SCP 08 SCP B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version 3 of SCP 09 C2 M BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of
183. Programming Guide Ed 00 423 SIT MODE Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port TRUNK The BRI trunk port use ISDN trunk STATION The BRI trunk port use for ISDN phone PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 423 725 S T MODE Display shows first BRI TRUNK 2 Dial trunk number e g 727 727 S T MODE OR TRUNK Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL S T MODE Press ANS RLS button to select ALL TRUNK 3 Enter Circuit type 727 S T MODE OR STATION Press Volume button to select option Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART MMC 419 BRI OPTION MMC 421 MSN DIGIT MMC 424 S0 MAPPING Page 2 148 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 424 BRI S0 MAPPING This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY
184. RESET Prompt to restart MGI card when IP address is changed This use for MGI 1 and 2 only is self restart automatically e This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 The first 3 parameters IP ADDRESS GATEWAY and SUB MASK changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MGI is reset PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC Page 2 374 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 831 Display shows the first MGI card 2 Enter MGI number OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter MGI parameter number OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter MGI parameter OR Press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA IP ADDRESS 1 1 1 1 GATEWAY 1 1 1 1 SUB MASK 255 255 255 0 PUBLIC IP 1 1 1 1 STS PERIOD 00 SEC VERSION V4 CARD RESET NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 615 MGI GROUP MMC 83
185. RM THRESHOLD 75 3 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA 80 ITEMS NONE Page 2 318 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 756 ASSIGN VM MOH This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card This MMC is used to assign each port a Music on Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Built In Voice Mail Card hard disk drive The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099 Basically Built In Voice Mail Card supports various music for numbers 5000 to 5099 If you want to use default Built In Voice Mail Card support music select the number Otherwise make sure you record the sound file first The next step is to assign the sound file to a Built In Voice Mail port For example if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Built In Voice Mail port e g 225 This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549 Now 225 will show up as a valid music source in MMC 308 309 and 408 Each Music on Hold source assigned here requires one Built In Voice Mail port If the first Built In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH it must be disabled before boot up since Built In Voice Mail Card and the system use port 1 during boot up to exchange critical information For this reason we suggest yo
186. ROGRAMMING CID PROGRAMMING DID PROGRAMMING VMAA PROGRAMMING ALARM PROGRAMMING MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 61 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door box button is pressed If the ring plan destinations are not input the default ring plan 1 is used Available Ring Plan inputs are 1 through 6 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Clears previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 211 Display shows first door phone 2 Dial door phone number e g 230 OR Press Volume button to scroll through door phone numbers and use the Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select All door ring 3 Enter new ring plan number selection via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA STATION GROUP 500 RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 62 DISPLAY 229 DOOR RING 15500 2 500 230 DOOR RING 15500 25500 ALL DOOR RING 12500 2 500 250 DOOR RIN
187. S Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 713 LCR MODIFY 001 Display shows NOF DEL DGT 00 2 Enter index number e g 005 LCR MODIFY 005 OR NOF DEL DGT 00 Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter number of digits to delete LCR MODIFY 005 OR NOF DEL DGT 01 Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to next step Page 2 238 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Enter digits to be inserted e g 10288 LCR MODIFY 005 OR 1 10288 Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and advance to next step 5 Enter digits to be appended e g 45678 LCR MODIFY 005 OR D Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 239 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination It also provides a call waiting option if needed so that a second incoming DID call can be received The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID n
188. SCMT NONE VMS COMMENT Requires SVM 800 VMSMSG NONE VMS MESSAGE Requires SVM 800 VMSOUT NONE VMS OUT CALL Requires SVM 800 VMSREC NONE VMS RECORD Requires SVM 800 VMSVAC NONE VMS VACANT Requires SVM 800 VREC 682 VOICE RECORD Requires VDIAL card WAKEUP 18 WAKE UP Related to Hotel Motel Features WCOS 59 WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry DISPLAY STN DIAL NUM C1 S2 Oe 20152 ABAND 642 2 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 265 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Dial first letter of feature name e g 7 AND Press Volume button to make selection then press Right Soft button to advance cursor 4 Enter digits e g 63 via the dial keypad 5 Press Right Soft button to enter change and continue to make changes If an error message appears indicating duplication of access code enter 1 for YES for change or enter 0 for NO for no change 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION FEATURE CODES ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS ALL Page 2 266 FEAT NUMBER PLAN PAGE 552 FEAT NUMBER PLAN P
189. SE MMC 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC 319 BRANCH GROUP MMC 320 PRESET FWD NO ANSWER MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER 4 2 3 Trunk Related MMC MMC Program No Program Description MNC 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK MMC 401 Trunk Line PBX LINE MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC 404 TRUNK NAME MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE MMC 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC 413 VMS CALL TYPE MMC 414 PRS SIGNAL MMC 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC 416 ASSIGN E amp M DID RINGDOWN MMC 417 E1 PRI CRC4 OPTION MMC 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 9 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming MMC Program No OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Program Description MMC 421 MSN DIGIT MMC 422 TRUNK COS MMC 423 S T MODE MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING MMC 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS MMC 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE MNC 433 COST RATE MMC 434 CONNECTION STATUS MMC 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN 4 24 Timer and Tone Related MMC MMC Program No Program Description MNC
190. SETS 05 48 64B AOMS 06 20 BTN SETS 07 28 BTN SETS 08 18 BTN SETS 09 8BTNSETS 10 99 BTN SETS 38 BIN SETS 12 21 BTN SETS 13 14 BTN SETS DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MCID NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND DIAL 8 TG UA VDIAL DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP See Programmable button Assignments on MMC 722 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 259 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 723 TYPE 24 BTN SETS Display shows 01 CALL1 gt 2 Enter type of set via dial keypad e g 1 TYPE 12 BTN SETS OR 01 CALL1 gt Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Enter key number e g 03 12 BTN SETS OR 03 NONE gt Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Using table above press dial keypad number 12 BTN SETS to make selection 03 NONEGPIK OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender if required OR Press Left Soft button to re
191. SUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 29 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock appointment reminder feature for any station This must be done for single line telephones because they cannot access programming Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm as described below The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded 0 NOTSET No alarm 1 TODAY Alarm only once 2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the message is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the bottom left programmable button will change the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right NOTE COUNT 1 N A DIAL 0 lt DIAL 1 Space DI
192. Serv 500 system During registration the IP and MAC addresses are also registered The User ID and Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered The system made default phone numbers are 3201 3299 and made default User ID s match the default station numbers 3201 3299 The system default password is 1234 IP phones must be individually programmed with User ID and Password to register with the system 00 USER ID This is the ID the IP phone must match to register with the OfficeServ 500 System This entry can be alphanumeric Default first 99 IP phones are 3201 3299 others are EMPTY 01 USER PSWD This is the Password the IP phone must also have to register with the OfficeServ 500 system This entry be alphanumeric Default is 1234 02 IP ADDR This is the IP address of the IP phone once registered with the system This is read only data Default is 0 0 0 0 03 MAC ADDR This is MAC address of the IP phone once registered with the system This is read only data Default is FFFFFFFFFFFF 04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone once registered with the system This is read only data This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers firewalls etc Default is 6000 05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone once registered with the system This is read only data This information will be needed when traversing
193. Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA FORCED MODE RELATED ITEMS MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 743 DBS STATUS MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER Page 2 298 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 740 STATION PAIR Assigns a secondary station to a phone This secondary station can be a phone or single line port The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding Class of Service LCR Class and DND attributes of the primary station If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301 the change affects both stations Secondary stations when dialled will also ring the primary extension Message from secondary extension will display that secondary extension numbers Callback to extension secondary as well PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 740 201 PRIMARY Display shows SECONDARY NONE 2 Enter the primary station number via dial 201 PRIMARY keypad e g 201 SECONDARY NONE OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 3 Enter the secondary station number via dial 201 PRIMARY keypad e g 205 SECONDARY 205 OR Press Volume button to
194. T ARE YOU SURE NO Page 2 311 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card It assigns each station or group as having a mailbox yes or no When stations or groups are flagged as YES during Voice Mail card power up mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a YES entry Once the Voice Mail database has been created new boxes can be added a Through Voice Mail administration b By adding a new mailbox in this system and cycling system power If a mailbox is to be removed it must be done through Voice Mail administration If a station that do not have an associated voice mailbox call the Voice Mail system they will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting Mailboxes that are needed for people that do not have an extension must be added through Voice Mail programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 751 ASSIGN MAIL BOX Display shows 201 YES 2 Dial station number ASSIGN MAIL BOX OR 202 YES Press Volume button to scroll the number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES ASSIGN MAIL BOX OR 202 NO Press Volume button to make sel
195. T code table 0 OR Press Volume button to make select ion and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter access code table number 00 62 via dial 0 01 ACCESS DGT keypad 1 OR Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter access code item 0 6 via dial keypad 0 01 ACCESS DGT OR 1 Press Volume button to make select ion and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Enter access code data via dial keypad 0 01 ACCESS DGT OR 840 Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ACCESS DGT 00 09 digits 0 9 10 62 NONE DGT LENGTH 1 DEL LENGTH 1 INSERT DGT NONE IP TABLE 1 00 IP START NONE GK USE NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 836 H 323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 377 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 833 VoIP IP TABLE This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry 832 There 63 tables with up to 16 entries each The destination IP address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields
196. TA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE Page 2 230 DISPLAY AUTHOR CODE 001 CALON AUTHOR CODE 005 ea Qi AUTHOR CODE 005 123845071800 Cail AUTHOR CODE 005 112 321 5 57 6 90 C25 05 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 708 ACCOUNT CODE Enables the account code entry feature There are 999 available entries PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 708 ACCOUNT CODE Display shows 001 2 Dial code index number e g 005 ACCOUNT CODE OR 005 Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter account code maximum 12 digits via ACCOUNT CODE dial keypad e g 1234 005 1234 and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 231 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 709 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE TABLE This MMC provides a means to program three trunk code tables as described below PBX CODE This table contains up to five entri
197. TATE STORE STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER SYSALM SYSTEM ALARMS TG TRUNK GROUP TIMER TIMER TRARPT TRAFFIC REPORT Page 2 256 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming TRSF TRANSFER UA UNIVERSAL ANSWER VDIAL VOICE DIAL Requires VDIAL card VG VMS GROUP MESSAGE Requires SVM 800 VM VOICE MAIL MEMO Requires SVMi card VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION Requires SVMi card VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION Requires SVMi card VMMSG VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY Requires SVMi card VMSCMT VMS COMMENT Requires SVM 800 VMSMSG VMS MESSAGE Requires SVM 800 VMSOUT VMS OUT CALL Requires SVM 800 VMSREC VMS RECORD Requires SVM 800 VMSVAC VMS VACANT Requires SVM 800 VREC VOICE RECORD Requires VDIAL card VT VOICEMAIL TRANSFER WAKEUP WAKE UP Related to Hotel Motel Features XCHIN EXPRESS CHECK IN Related to Hotel Motel Features PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 722 201 KEY MAST Display shows 01 CALL1 gt 2 Enter selected station number e g 205 205 KEY MAST OR 01 CALL1 gt Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter selected key number e g 18 201 KEY MAST OR 18
198. TEL NUMBER MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 381 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS This MMC provides various MGI DSP options The options set in this MMC are MGI type specific MGI card types are followed 0 MGI3 Supports maximum 16 channels G 711 G 723 1 G 729 G729A or T 38 Default 8 channels and 8 channels on option board 1 MGI2 Supports 16 channels G 711 or G 729 A 2 MGI1 Supports 16 channels G 711 only parameters are followed 00 AUDIO CODEC Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used G 729A 8k G 729 8K G 711 64K G 723 1 5 3K 6 4K Default is G 729A 01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation This function removes echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay Default is ENABLE 02 SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call and conserves bandwidth when enabled Default is ENABLE 03 IN FILTER This option select input filtering of the DSP This should always be set as ENABLE 04 OUT FILTER This option select output filtering of the DSP This should always be set as ENABLE 05 INPUT GAIN
199. TION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 601 501 STN GROUP Display shows TYPE NORMAL GRP 2 Dial group number e g 505 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE NORMAL GRP Press Volume button to select group and Press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial feature option number 0 7 e g 0 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE VMAA GROUP Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 DIAL group type e g 1 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE VMAA GROUP Press Volume button to make selection Press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 191 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Dial feature option number 0 6 e g 1 505 STN GROUP OR RING DISTRIBUTE Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Dial ring option 0 2 e g 0 505 STN GROUP OR RING SEQUENTIAL Press Volume button to make selection Press Left Soft button to move cursor back to RING or press Right Soft button to return to step 2 7 Dial next feature option and continue 505 STN GROUP OR RING SEQUENTIAL Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 8 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NORMAL GROUP RELATED ITEMS MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC 600 ASSIGN
200. UT The phone cannot make calls outside the system It can however make and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls When in this mode the Hold button of the phone will flash slow RED 2 LOCKEDALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls When in this mode the Hold button of the phone will light steady RED PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 100 201 STN LOCK Display shows UNLOCKED 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 STN LOCK OR UNLOCKED Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL STN LOCK Press ANS RLS button to select all stations Su 3 Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock e g 1 205 STN LOCK OR LOCKED OUT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED RELATED ITEMS STATION USER PROGRAMMING Page 2 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone s passcode to its default value of 1234 This MMC cann
201. Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 107 201 EXT MAST Display shows first station 01 CALL1 gt 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 EXT MAST OR 01 CALL1 gt Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Press the Right Soft button to 201 EXT MAST program the phone 01 CALL1 gt OR Use Volume button to scroll through the phone and 201 EXT AOM1 and use the Right Soft button to move the 01 05 cursor 4 Enter key number e g 18 205 EXT MAST 18 DS2 Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Press the key to be programmed 205 EXT MAST Dial extender according to above table 18 05207 gt System will return to this step If no more entries press Left Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 15 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 108 STATION STATUS OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Displays the following attributes of a stat
202. Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume NOTE Down button to move the cursor left A space can be entered by using these keys COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 0 lt gt DIAL 1 1 3 DIAL 2 2 A B C DIAL 3 3 D E F DIAL 4 4 H DIAL 5 5 J K L DIAL 6 6 M N DIAL 7 7 P Q R S DIAL 8 8 T U V DIAL 9 9 X Y Z DIAL The button can be used for special characters space amp 96 lt gt C ND t 35 V and PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options move cursor left or right KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 115 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 405 Display shows 2 Dial trunk e g 704 OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter trunk number using the procedure described above 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 404 TRUNK NAME Page 2 116 DISPLAY
203. able these being continuous and interrupted as described below 0 INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings The shortest on time is 100ms and the longest on time is 3000ms The timer is adjusted in 100ms increments 1 CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message the lamp will be lit steady PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 511 MW LAMP CADENCE Display shows INTERRUPT LED 2 Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE MW LAMP CADENCE OR INTERRUPT LED Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to advance step 3 3 Dial new values for interrupt times four digits MW LAMP CADENCE 2000 2000 Press Right Soft button to move cursor back If valid entry system returns to step 2 Press Left Soft button to move cursor back If valid entry system returns to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA INTERRUPT LED 1000MS ON 1000MS OFF RELATED ITEMS MWSLI SUPPORTED CARDS ONLY SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 183 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year The system will override the normal ring plan for these days a
204. ace 7 5 DIAL 2 A DIAL 3 DIAL 4 Q9 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 1 4 2 lt lt gt o DIAL 9 DIAL 1 The button can be used for the following special characters space amp p gt A 2 23 lt 2 5 e Jh m gt 2 and Page 2 34 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 118 201 GRP 1 NAME Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 203 1 NAME OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 5 to select group 203 GRP 1 OR Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial 0 to select name or dial 1 4 to select member 203 GRP 1 MBR1 NONE OR Press Volume button to select name or member and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 5 Enter conference member dial number and press 203 GRP 1 MBR1 Ri
205. ain the status before the opposite party disconnect the call the PRS DET TM must be set to 0 RNG DET TM RiNG DETect TiMe This is the minimum length of ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal that the system will send on an E amp M circuit MF DP INT This is the interval between sending digit In case of DTMF signal over the 500ms will be serviced as 100 ms MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected This is to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL Page 2 171 2 Programming ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 503 Display shows 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks 3 Dial timer number from the list OR Press Volume button to select timer and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter new timer value must be four digits e g 0200 System returns to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DISPLAY 701 ANS BAK TM 0600 MS 704 ANS BAK TM 0600 5 gt ALL ANS BAK TM 0600
206. alia New Zealand and U K only NOTE PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry Page 2 246 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION Press Transfer button enter 716 Display shows Enter option number 0 3 via dial keypad Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter entry number 01 16 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter network access code via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter use option number 0 3 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS M M M M M MMC 400 TENANT ON OFF PER TRUNK MC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 0 N 0 N 0 NI 0 NI 0 DISPLAY ETWORK CODE des USE ETWORK CODE NONE ike USE ETWORK CODE NONE ils US
207. an be replaced with a customised message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special Applications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution TRANSFER MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller is transferred This message has a default selection of ROM message number 53 but it can be replaced with a customised message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special Applications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution BUSY MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller selects a busy station This message has a default selection of ROM message number 52 but it can be replaced with a customised message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special Applications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution NO STATION MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller dials an invalid extension not installed This message has a default selection of ROM message number 50 but it can be replaced with a customised message 01 48 or with any other ROM message Page 2 286 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 49 64 This retry message will repeat for the value contained in the retry counter See Retry Count For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special A
208. and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 508 UNIT COST PER MP Display shows 0100PESET gt 2 Dial 0 OR l e g 1 CALL COST RATE OR 100 2 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter new value e g 110 for 110 percent CALL COST RATE System returns to step 2 110 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 179 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA UNIT COST PER MP 100 PERCENT CALL COST 100 PERCENT RELATED ITEMS MMC 110 STATION ON OFF CALL COST OPTION Page 2 180 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 510 SLI RING CADENCE Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system wide basis There are 5 cadences available Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings 1 STN RING This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at TRK RING This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at DOOR RING This is the cadence doorphone calls will ring at ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at PR
209. ar to a Cell phone OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network In case of NONE 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network In other cases MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network UNKNOWN Unknown number INT NAT International number NATIONAL National number NETWORK Network specific number SUBSCRIB Subscriber number EXTEN Local number ABBREV Abbreviated number NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan ISDN ISDN numbering plan CCITT E 163 164 DATA Data numbering plan CCITT X 121 TELEX Telex numbering plan CCITT F 69 NATIONAL National standard numbering plan PRIVATE Private numbering plan EXTEN Local numbering plan SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 420 701 PRI OPTION Display shows CHANNEL ANY YES 2 Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card e g 730 17301 PRI OPTION OR CHANNEL ANY YES Pre
210. ards for proper signalling This MMC is only for analog types of DID E amp M trunks These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714 The signalling condition types are as follows 0 IMMEDIATE START 1 DELAYED START 2 WINK START PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 412 Display shows 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks 3 Enter desired trunk type selection from above list OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA IMMEDIATE RELATED ITEMS 416 E amp M DID RINGDOWN MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION Page 2 128 DISPLAY 701 TRK SIGNAL IMMEDIATE START 705 TRK SIGNAL IMMEDIATE START ALL TRK SIGNAL IMMEDIATE START 705 TRK SIGNAL WINK START SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 413 VMS CALL TYPE This program needs when VOICE MAIL AUTO ATTENDANT SVM 800 is used Defines the type of signalling for voice mail assigned trunk AP ANSWERING PHONE AT AUDIO
211. arget COS e g 06 OR Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2 4 Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press RIGHT soft to advance cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Page 2 216 DISPLAY COPY COS ITEMS 0501 gt 0801 COPY COS ITEMS 0505 gt 0501 COPY COS ITEMS 0505 gt 0506 COS CONTENTS 06 TOLL LEVEL A SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command This MMC is primarily used for creating a new class of service If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed a programmed CONF key must be available to allow re entry into a conference call There are 30 classes of service available This MMC is divided into 5 categories 0 TOLL LEVEL 0 A Follow toll class A Unrestricted 1 B Follow toll class B in MMC 702 703 2 C Follow toll class C in MMC 702 703 3 D Follow toll class D in MMC 702 703 4 E Follow toll class E in MMC 702 703 5 F Follow toll class F in MMC 702 703 6 G Follow toll class G in MMC 702 703 7 H Follow toll class H AII restricted 1 USABLE FEATURES COS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 00 AA CALER YES Auto answer
212. arts the Ring Plan 1 at 00 00 The system will stay Ring Plan 1 until 08 00 and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan If a Ring Plan ends and there are no additional Ring Plans the system will default to the Ring Plan with time that extends past the expired ring plan time Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence IE RP 1 2 3 4 etc A Ring Plan cannot be omitted IE RP 1 2 5 etc A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time before a lower numbered Ring Plan Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan of each day If no Ring Plan destination is input the operator group is the default destination SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 177 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 507 RING PLAN SUN 1 Display shows ST END 2 Dial day number 0 6 e g 3 RING PLAN WED 1 OR ST END Press Volume button to select day Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3 3 Dial ring plan number 1 6 e g 2 RING PLAN WED 2 OR ST END Press Volume button to select day Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4 4 Dial start time e g
213. associated with a station or trunk number on a per PRI BRI basis When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI the maximum 16 digits number entered will be the Calling Party Number sent on this outgoing PRI call There are 4 tables for system In case of empty system use MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER for the Calling Party Number PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options move cursor left or right KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 323 201 SEND CLIP Display shows 1 2 Dial extension or trunk number e g 230 230 SEND CLIP OR Press Volume button to select extension and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Dial table number 230 SEND CLIP OR Press Volume button to select table number and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 4 Enter the Calling Party Number 230 SEND CLIP 2 3055922900 5 Repeat Step 3 amp 4 to enter other tables and Calling Party Numbers OR Repeat Steps 2 3 amp 4 to enter other station or trunk and Calling Party Numbers 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 105 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA EMPTY RELATED ITEMS MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER MMC
214. button to select a station OR ALL CID DISP Press ANS RLS button to select ALL and press NUMBER FIRST the Right Soft button 3 Dial display option 0 1 or 2 e g 2 205 CID DISP OR NAME FIRST Press Volume button to select option and press Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC Page 2 36 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA NUMBER FIRST RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 425 ASSIGN CID TRUNKS MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS MMC 728 CALLER ID TRANSLATION TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 37 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 120 LARGE LCD OPTION OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Allows the system administrator to set any of the large LCD phone for the following options IDLE DISPLAY at idle state Sets whether to display CANENDER or INFORMATION on LCD DS KEY DISPLAY Sets whether to display Dial Number or Directory for DS key on LCD DIAL MODE Sets dial mode ENBLOCK or OVERLAP of phone PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous
215. calls simultaneously Using the hook flash to toggle between them When ON a single line telephone will be able to connect to the second call but pressing the hook flash will not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single line telephone to the first call 26 RECALL DISC OFF When ON the system disconnects a call when transfer recall 29 ARD TONE CHK ON When OFF the system use time for checking destination is busy when auto retry 30 VPN ENABLE OFF When ON the Australia type VPN enabled 31 IN TOLL CHK OFF When OFF the system doesn t toll restrict when incoming call 32 ISDN PROGCON OFF When ON if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS message from ISDN trunk the call will connect without CONNECT message 33 INCLUDE VAT OFF When OFF not printed VAT total line when Hotel Report Available in Hotel Motel enabled only 36 DSS KEY DPU SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OFF When ON directed pick up the call when press ringing DS key Page 2 59 2 Programming 37 OPTIONS BEGN DGT DSP DEFAULT OFF OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DESCRIPTION When ON an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled then the first dialled digits are shown on the phone display 38 ONE TCH FACC OFF When OFF the forced accoun
216. cally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for more than 250 ms Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 35 MJD04 Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 36 MJD05 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on TEPRI card Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 37 MJD06 Yellow Alarm Rec Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on TEPRI card Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 38 MJD07 Blue Alarm All one s being transmitted on facility on TEPRI Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 39 MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 40 MJD09 Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the when error rate exceeds 1x10 6 errors Note 1x10 is threshold for minor alarm 1 x 10 is threshold for major alarm errors on E1 PRI or BRI Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 41 MJD10 NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI Network digital line Protocols do not match or subscriber ID mismatch Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 42 MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI received an error from the network Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 43 MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI has recovered from an error on the network Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 44 MJD13 LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 45 MJD14 LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test
217. cement but the ANS RLS Button or handset must be used to answer calls PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 103 201 ANS MODE Display shows RING MODE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 ANS MODE OR RING MODE Press Volume button to select phone and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL ANS MODE Press ANS RLS button to select 3 Dial 0 or 2 to change ring mode 205 ANS MODE OR VOICE ANNOUNCE Press Volume button to select ring mode and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above Page 2 6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL PHONES RING RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 7 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 104 STATION NAME Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11 character name to identify an individual station Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if
218. cessed programming directly MODEM This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC the integrated V90 modem attached to the IOM board of main cabinet LAN This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN connection on the MCP2 card of main cabinet SIOx This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO connections on the IOM board of the main cabinet where x is the number 2 or 3 of the SIO port that was used PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 856 1 11 22 11 032 Display shows 2910511722 11327 2 Enter index number e g 3 3 11 22 12 302 OR 205 211 22 13430 Press Volume button to scroll 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 411 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 858 ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM Assigns the alarm for alarm information to send Remote M amp A PC via LAN ALARM CODE DEFINITION See Alarm Code Definition on MMC 852 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1
219. cific trunk rings that phone There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for single line sets There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station F STN option for the phones There are 5 cadences and a follow station option for SLT s TONE OPTION F STN Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency 1 8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring phones with this ring frequency CADENCE OPTION F STN Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences 1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT s with the intercom ring cadence Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT s with the CO ring cadence Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT s with the DOOR ring cadence 2 3 4 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT s with the ALARM ring cadence 5 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT s with the CALLBACK ring cadence PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL Page 2 100 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 318 Display shows first station Dial trunk or station number e g 705 OR Press Volume
220. clear previous entry A Used to enter P on destination field B Used to enter B on digit or destination field C Used to enter C on destination field D Used to enter D on destination field ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 732 AA TRANS TB 01 Display shows 001 0 gt 500 2 TABLE number 01 12 e g 02 TRANS 02 001 gt Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT Soft button 3 Dial ENTRY number 001 100 e g 002 AA TRANS TB 02 OR 002 NONE Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 4 Enter Dial DIGIT and press Right Soft button AA TRANS TB 02 002 2 NONE 5 Enter Destination AA TRANS TB 02 OR 002 2 201 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 283 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA TABLE 01 ENTRY DIGITS DESTINATION 001 0 500 002 DERE B 003 004 005 006 9 P03 ALL OTHER TABLES ARE EMPTY RELATED ITEMS MMC 733 AUTO ATTENDANT PLAN PROGRAMMING MMC 507 RING PLAN TIME Page 2 284 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 733 AA PLAN TABLE Used to program each AA plan A plan is a module that processes a call There are twelve plans available in each AA card Each plan can
221. d call from the station number dialled by the caller The digits defined in the first field of this MMC dialled digits must be a valid station number If the digits programmed as a destination are a voice mail port the voice mail port will receive an in band packet of DTMF equal to FWD from EXTENSION NUMBER DIALLED There are a number of special characters that are used in translation tables They are as follows Used to represent any digit P Special Key A Plan Used to assign a plan as a destination P01 P12 B Special Key B Buffer When used in the destination field transfers the call to the same extension as the digits dialled by the caller C Special Key C Change greeting or Ring Plan DESTINATION Consider the following entry examples DIGITS DEST COMMENTS 0 0 Caller will be transferred to 0 2 B If a caller dials any three digit extension number beginning with 2 the call will be transferred to the extension number dialled 4882 C If a caller dials 48222 the current plan s greeting may be changed 4842 is essentially a special passcode for changing the current greeting or ring plan 1 526 If a caller dials 1 the call will be transferred to group 526 5 P08 If a caller dials 5 the call will be transferred to plan 08 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 281 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 programming In these cases the system wil
222. d Page 2 367 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK The system clock may be synchronized with a external clock source from TEPRI card PRI card or BRI card or use the internal clock source In this MMC you can select to use internal clock source and assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is used The external clock source of TEPRI card PRI card or BRI card only can be selected PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 826 REFERENCE CLOCK Display shows PRIORITY 1 C1 S1 2 Dial the priority number 1 9 or 1 3 EFERENCE CLOCK OR PRIORITY 1 C1 S1 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial the priority data REFERENCE CLOCK OR RIORITY 1 C1 S1 Press Volume button to select and Press Right Soft button to store tg 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA PRIORITY 1 1 81 PRIORITY 2 C1 S2 PRIORITY 3 C1 S3 PRIORITY 4 2 81 PRIORITY 5 C2 S2 PRIORITY 6 C2 S3 PRIORITY 7 C3 SI PRIORITY 8 C3 S2 PRIORITY 9 C3 S3 RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 368 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed
223. d enter to exit OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 414 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 860 UCD STATUS SERVICE This MMC is set to send the information of the UCD queue status or UCD Agent status to the SIO port real time To use this information a special PC application is needed PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 860 UCD VIEW SERVICE Display shows DISABLE 2 Enter the number SEND AGENT STATE 0 UCD view service 1 Send Agent state YES OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter YES or 0 SEND AGENT STATE OR NO Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to store 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA UCD VIEW SERVICE DISABLE SENT AGENT STATE NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 804 SYSTEM I O PARAMETER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 415 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS This MMC is set to system miscellaneous options 0 AUTO UPDATE TIME Sets enable 1 or disable 0 the system automatically time and date update form ISDN call connection message If
224. d with a customized message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special Applications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 285 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ALTERNATE MESSAGE This is the message that will be heard by the caller when the AA port answers a call if this message has been selected by the AA administrator This message has a default selection of 49 but it can be replaced with a customized message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special Applications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution INVALID MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller dials invalid digits repeatedly until the retry counter expires Invalid digits are digits not contained in the translation table for this plan The invalid message will repeat for the value contained in the retry counter This message has a default selection of ROM message 64 but it can be replaced with a customised message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special Applications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution NO ANSWER MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller is recalled to the AA port because of a no answer This message has a default selection of ROM message number 51 but it c
225. data via dial keypad e g 125 1 25 COST RATE 3 OR tS RCO 205 Press Volume button to select data and press Right Soft button to save and move step 3 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL COST RATES NO DATA RELATED ITEMS MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 309 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 750 VM CARD RESTART This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug In Voice Mail Card There are two options available in this MMC DOWNLOAD When the Built In Voice Mail card starts part of the power up procedure will download data from the system to determine time date what mailboxes to create and system numbering plan This must be done at least once but once done this download feature can be turned NO to save boot up time CARD RESTART If this option is set to YES the Built In Voice Mail card will immediately restart according to the download OPTION specified above VIRTUAL NUMBER DOWNLOAD This option is determine which type virtual port include during mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure The virtual port type are followed 0 VIRTUAL EXT Virtual extension number 1 IP PHONE IP based phone number 2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number 3 WIP WITH WLI Wireless IP based mobile phone number works with WLI card 4
226. ddress 165 213 97 165 2 Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM IP ADDR Press Right Soft button to move cursor 165 213 97 185 3 Using keypad enter three digit IP octet SYSTEM IP ADDR numbers 192 168 001 010 IE 192 168 001 010 for 192 168 1 10 Cursor will return to Step 1 upon completion of IP address entry 4 Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM GATEWAY Press Right Soft button to move cursor 165 218 BH 1 5 Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet SYSTEM GATEWAY numbers 192 168 001 001 IE 192 168 001 001 for 192 168 1 1 Cursor will return to Step 5 upon completion of system gateway entry 6 Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM RESTART press Right Soft button to move cursor ARE YOU SURE NO Page 2 372 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 7 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor 8 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SYSTEM IP ADDR 165 213 97 185 SYSTEM GATEWAY 165 213 97 1 SYSTEM NET MASK 255 255 255 0 SYSTEM RESET NO SYSTEM IP TYPE PRIVATE IP ONLY SYSTEM PUBLIC IP 1 1 1 1 SYSTEM MAC ADDR CARD DEPENDANT PCMMC ADDRESS 168 219 1 101 REMOTE M A ADDR 168 219 1 102 RELATED ITEMS MMC 615 MGI GROUP MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE MMC 838 PRIVATE I
227. desired MMC VERIFY SUCCESS If passcode is incorrect TECH PASSCODE VERIFY FAILURE System returns to step 2 TECH PASSCODE NEW CODE 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA DEFAULT PASSCODE 4321 RELATED ITEMS MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Page 2 332 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Allows the System Administrator to have access to certain MMCs For example it 15 required that the System Administrator customer have access to MMC 102 Call Forward for call forwarding but it is not required that the System Administrator have access to MMC 710 LCR Digit Table for LCR dial plans This MMC is for both tenants PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 802 Display shows Enter desired tenant number 1 2 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to make additional ent
228. dress as public This allows devices on remote networks subnets to establish communications with the system without exposing your LAN See SYSTEM IP TYPE 06 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For your reference and cannot be changed The unique hardware MAC address of the MCP2 card 07 PCMMC ADDRESS When system wants connect to PCMMC system will be send to this IP address for connection message Reserved for future use 08 REMOTE M A ADDR SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd When system wants connect to remote M amp A PC system will be send to this IP address for connection message Reserved for future use Page 2 371 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 MASK are stored separate from the main system database thus will not be defaulted when MMC811 CLEAR MEMORY is performed Furthermore any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is reset g The first 3 parameters SYSTEM IP ADDR SYSTEM GATEWAY and SYSTEM NET PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR Display shows the system IP a
229. e 2 1 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION ALLOW 2 95 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page XV Table of Contents OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Cy This page is intentionally left blank Page XVI SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 1 Before Programming In this chapter the things to know before you start MMC programming and the phone buttons and cautions will be discussed 1 Introduction to Programming The MMC program means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation program There are 3 levels of MMC programming such as technician operator and station levels According to the programming level the station can program or cannot program the data change The technician level programming and the operator level programming require a passcode for each level while the station level programming does not require a passcode 1 1 Technician Level Program This level is allowed to program every level of program This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system but it can be done for only one phone at a time 1 2 Operator Level Program An technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC 802 Operator Program Range Setting Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group but it can be done for only one phone at a time 1 3 Station Level Program Programming can be done for only station level programs
230. e SMDR record PRS detection is also essential for dropping a trunk to trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party There are three types of PRS mode PRS 1 PRS 2 and PRS 3 PRS 1 When first PRS is detected call duration is started When second PRS is detected call duration timer stopped The call is not released until hanging on PRS2 When first PRS is detected call duration timer is started When second PRS is detected call duration timer is stopped and call is released PRS 3 The call duration timer starts based on the timer When first PRS is detected call duration timer is stopped and call is released PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 414 701 TRK PRS Display shows NONE 2 Dial desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRK PRS OR NONE Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right Soft button to move cursor Page 2 130 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 3 Dial 0 for PRS 1 1 for PRS 2 2 for PRS 3 or3 705 TRK PRS for MPD or 4 for NORMAL PRS 2 OR Press Volume button to scroll through options and use LEFT or Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker b
231. e network NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network UNKNOWN Unknown number INT NAT International number NATIONAL National number NETWORK Network specific number SUBSCRIB Subscriber number EXTEN Local number ABBREV Abbreviated number SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 5 NBPLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan ISDN ISDN numbering plan CCITT E 163 164 DATA Data numbering plan CCITT 121 TELEX Telex numbering plan CCITT F 69 NATIONAL National standard numbering plan PRIVATE Private numbering plan EXTEN Local numbering plan OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS 0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy e g Preferred channel selection If set to NO the user will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free e g Exclusive channel selection 1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied YES or NO PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL
232. ecifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local network subnet 02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices subnet that are within direct reach of the MCP2 without having to go through the designated network IP gateway 03 SYSTEM RESET Prompt to restart system MCP2 when system IP address is changed This reset is same to FAST RESTART on MMC 811 04 SYSTEM IP TYPE Defines which IP addressing relationship is used for communications to and from the MCP2 card 0 PRIVATE IP ONLY The system assumes all IP phones and VoIP connections are on the same network And all IP addresses are private IP address 1 PRIVATE w PUBLIC The system knows that there is a mixture of IP phones and VoIP connections on the same network and on remote network s thus communicates accordingly based upon the entries in MMC 840 for IP phones MMC 838 for other VoIP gateways or MMC 830 for other MCP2 2 PRIVATE IP ONLY The system assumes all IP phones and VoIP connections are on the same network And all IP addresses are public IP address 05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MCP2 will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address Communications to from this IP will require involvement of the MGI card The system identifies communications to from this ad
233. ection and press Right Soft button to save and move stop 2 Page 2 312 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS YES ALL GROUPS NO RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 313 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 752 AUTO RECORD This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card Some specific station in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations When this option is set all incoming all outgoing or all calls incoming or outgoing can be recorded When this option is selected a specific port can be assigned for each station set to automatic conversation recording or the effectiveness of this feature cannot be guaranteed In this MMC you can assign 1 Which station use this feature Station number 2 What mailbox the conversation are recorded in Mailbox number 3 Whattype of conversations are recorded in out or both I O or B 4 What port is dedicated to the station Voice mail port number A maximum of 8 stations can this feature in the system The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station Attempts to do this will result in an error message When a Voice Mail port is assigned here it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail
234. ection and press Right Soft button Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY S01 Wiss SOA DIAL YES 305 USE 301 DIAL YES ALL USE 301 DIAL YES 07 DIAL YES GOS US HN 9079 DIAL NO Page 2 153 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA DIAL YES RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 316 COPY STATION TRUNK USE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP Page 2 154 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 433 COST RATE In this MMC the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk DIAL PLANS are defined in MMC 746 Costing Dial Plan RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in MMC 747 Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk If an entry is left blank no call costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN Call type 8 15 fixed for incoming Apply a cost rate under type 8 only to a trunk if you want incoming call costing PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPE
235. ed as the data displayed on the LCD Page 1 6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non programmable one The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels such as technician operator and station level In this section the programmable MMC for each level will be 4 ProgramList introduced 4 4 Station Level Programming MMC Program No Program Description MMC 100 STATION LOCK MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC 102 CALL FORWARD MMC 103 SET ANSWER MODE MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 108 STATION STATUS MMC 109 DATE DISPLAY MMC 110 STATION ON OFF MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTION MMC 121 PHONE LANGUAGE MMC 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED MMC 125 EXECUTIVE STATE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 7 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 2 Operator Level Programming 4 2 1 System Related MMC 4 2 Station Related MMC Page 1 8 MMC Progra
236. em can provide eleven types of tone and three types of tones provided from Central Office or PBX system can be detected Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as some systems may require default settings BUSY TONE The called station is busy CONFM BARGE A feature has been successfully activated cleared or a Barge In with Tone has been performed DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses dialled digits DND NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons ERROR TONE An error has been made HOLD CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing RING TONE This is the tone heard from ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are called TRANSFERER This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT hook TONE flashes DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number CO BUSY TONE This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or PBX system CO RING BACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or PBX System CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX system PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next M
237. em returns to step 2 10 5 gt 20 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA MAKE BREAK 33 MAKE PULSES PER SECOND 10 PPS RELATED ITEMS MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 173 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Allows the system date and time to be set This will set the system wide clock YY Year 00 99 MM Month 01 12 DD Date 01 31 W Day 0 6 0 SUN 1 MON 2 TUE 3 WED 4 THU 5 FRI 6 SAT HH Hour 00 23 MM Minute 00 59 PROGRAM BUTTONS KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 505 Display shows 2 Enter new time and date using above table System returns to step 2 3 Verify time and date Re enter if necessary 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA FOLLOW SOFTWARE DATE 12 00 RELATED ITEMS Z Z lt MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS AUTO UPDATE TIME Page 2 174 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 801211109155 EW YYMMDDW 01110958 eye Ob ial ES got LESE S EW YYMMDDW 0901 1445 1445 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 506 TONE CADENCE Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system wide basis The syst
238. enter 731 3951 RAM CLEAR Display shows CLR RECORDED NO 2 Dial AA number e g 3951 3951 RAM CLEAR OR CLR RECORDED NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Dial O No 1 Yes 3951 RAM CLEAR OR CLR RECORDED YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 0 No or 1 Yes to confirm selection 3951 RAM CLEAR OR ARE YOU SURE NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 280 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE AA translation tables are responsible for routing calls based on digits dialled There are 12 translation tables available Each table can be assigned to one or more plans in MMC 733 Auto Attendant Plan Programming A translation table consists of a number of 100 entries Each entry number has two fields to program the first field 15 for the digits received by the caller and the second field 15 for the destination or action The destination field can be a station number station group or another plan Plans are entered by pressing special key A plus two digits 01 12 If a voice mail group is entered the call will be transferred to the voice mail system with the appropriate in band digit packet to indicate a Forwar
239. entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 120 201 IDLE DISP Display shows CALENDER 2 Enter station number e g 205 203 IDLE DISP OR CALENDER Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press the Right Soft button to select a station OR ALL IDLE DISP Press ANS RLS button to select ALL and press CALENDER the Right Soft button 3 Dial the option number from above list e g 4 203 DS KEY DSP OR TEL NUMBER Press Volume button to select the option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor 4 Press Volume button to select ON or OFF 203 DS KEY DSP Press the Left or Right Soft button to return to step EXT 2 OR Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit Page 2 38 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA IDLE DISP CALENDER DS KEY DSP TEL NUMBER DIAL MODE ENBLOCK RELATED ITEMS MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 39 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 121 PHONE LANGUAGE Allows phone users the ability to assign an LCD display based on user s own language 0 ENGLISH 1 GERMAN 2 PORTUGAL 3 NORSK 4 DANISH 5 DUTCH 6 ITALY 7 SPANISH 8 SWEDISH 9 SPANISH USA 10 FRENCH CANADA PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter se
240. eparator and up to 24 digits to be dialled These dialled digits may consist of 0 9 and 7 If the system recognises valid trunk or trunk group access number it will automatically insert the separator PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry B Used to insert a flash code C Used to insert a pause code D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code E Used to mask unmask following digits shows as or F Used to enter name for speed dial bin see MMC 706 ANS RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728 CID translation table ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 705 SYS SPEED DIAL Display shows 500 2 Dial speed index desired e g 505 SYS SPEED DIAL OR 505 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter access code e g 9 701 plus the phone SYS SPEED DIAL number up to 24 digits digits will scroll under 505 9 121223456789 and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to SYS SPEED NAME enter name DON Page 2 226 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 5 If you want to save the speed dial number and SYS SPEED DIAL name data t
241. er Set Relocation program will allow set relocation as long as the station types are similar 12 button and 24 button assignments should be taken in consideration when relocating these types of sets due to the button configurations of the instruments If a 12 button set and a 24 button set are exchanged using the Customer Set Relocation program the first twelve buttons on the 24 button set will have the button programming of the 12 button set The 12 button set will then have the programming of the first twelve buttons of the 24 button set In other words when exchanging 12 and 24 button set only the first twelve buttons will swapped access to this feature is default OFF 802 Page 2 94 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Table 2 1 Customer Set Relocation Allow Table SIL DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS IP IP IP 6B 12B 24B 48B 64B 28B 18B 8B 210 14D 12L 210 14D 12L SIL YININININININININININININININ 6 N Y NININININININININININININ 0528 N NY Y N N N N NN N N N 0528 N NY Y N N N N NN N N N DS48B N N Y Y N N N N NN DS64B N N N Y Y
242. er case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 N A DIAL 0 lt DIAL 1 Space DIAL 2 A DIAL 3 0 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 3 4 2 IN Io DIAL 9 lt lt 2 0 o DIAL The button can be used for the following special characters space amp ls T po 33 5 7 lt gt A Q ES T 325 2 and SAMSUNG Electronics Ltd Page 2 43 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 125 201 EXEC STATE Display shows IN THE ROOM 2 Dial executive station number e g 205 205 EXEC STATE OR IN THE ROOM Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 3 for selects option 205 EXEC STATE OR IN THE ROOM Press Volume button to make selection and press Ri
243. er e g 005 via dial DID DIGIT 005 keypad Deme OR Page 2 242 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter digits to be translated e g 5065 via dial DID DIGIT keypad and press Right Soft button to move DGT 5065 cursor Enter the MOH source for this entry DID DIGIT OR MOH SOURCE Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 3 above Enter station or group number for each Ring DID DIGIT Plan destination via dial keypad e g 530 1 530 De OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance next step Enter call wait option via dial keypad DID DIGIT 1 for YES 0 for NO CW N MC 99 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance next step 005 005 NONE 005 005 DC 0 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 7 Enter maximum call count via dial keypad DID DIGIT 005 00 99 CW N MC 99 0 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance next step 8 Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad DID DIGIT 005 0 16 CW N MC 99 DC 0 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance next step 9 Enter name via dial keypad and press RIGHT DIGIT 005 NAME _ Soft button to return to
244. er name using above table and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd TAX AE TAX HE TAX TWE TAX TY BI TAX DISPLAY RATE E VAL RATE VAL RATE VAL VAL 00 00 BE 2 327 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA rates RELATED ITEMS MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE Page 2 328 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming 00 762 ROOM COST 2 Programming This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates according to week Each room cost Rate can be assigned with the percentage of the room cost from Sunday to Saturday a Available in Hotel Motel enabled only Example If you set SUN 150 1 MON 100 2 TUE 090 If you set 100 for the room cost in CHECK IN procedure under above condition The real room cost will be 150 on Sunday and 90 on Tuesday PROGRAM KEY VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 762 Display shows 2 Dia
245. er page SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 369 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 829 01 DATA TYPE Display shows SMDR 2 Enter type of data to be printed 02 DATA TYPE OR UCD REPORT Press Volume button to select the type and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter the item number 02 PRINTER IP OR 2005 12 d 1 Press Volume button to select the item and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor 4 Select the data 02 PRINTER IP OR 168 219 83 101 Press the VOLUME to select the data and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit the program OR Press Speaker button to move on to the next program DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 370 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol IP addressing of the OfficeServ 500 system MCP2 card This MMC must be utilized if there are ITP series phones and or MGI cards used on the system 00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP2 card 01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Sp
246. er selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 815 CUST DBASE SMDB Display shows 8 12 01 01 00 00 If the Smart Media is used already the display CUST DBASE SMDB shows SMART IS BUSY 2 Press Right Soft button to move cursor CUST DBASE SMDB 5 12 01 01 00 00 3 Press Volume button to make selection and press CUST DBASE SMDB Right Soft button to move cursor CLEAR SMDB NO Page 2 352 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button 5 Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button If you select YES the display shows 6 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 7 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 8 Input save time OR Press Right Soft button to move cursor 9 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 10 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to make change and return to the step 9 11 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA DAILY SAVE 00 00 no daily save RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming CUST DBASE SMDB CLEAR SMDB YES
247. es the caller will be routed to the AA card It is here that the caller is played the UCD FIRST MESSAGE and SECOND MESSAGE while in queue This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination This MMC includes options to select messages to play to a caller These messages can be as follows MESSAGES 01 48 These can be created using the AAREC Soft button programmed on phones by using MMC 722 or 723 A total of two minutes of message time is available and can be divided up into 1 to 48 messages MESSAGES 49 64 These are pre programmed as follows 49 Thank you for calling please dial your party s extension number 50 Invalid number please try again 5 sorry there is no answer 52 sorry that station is busy 53 One moment please 54 Transferring 55 TIl transfer you 56 Good bye 57 Thank you 58 Please hold for the operator 59 Please hold for assistance 60 Thank you good bye 61 I m sorry all stations are presently busy 62 Im sorry all stations are still busy 63 Please call back later 64 I m sorry not a valid selection SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 201 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 The following program options apply 00 FIRST MESSAGE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD grou
248. es and is used to identify the trunk access codes needed for toll restriction to be properly applied when the system is used either behind a PBX or with CENTREX supplied dial tone Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code SPECIAL CODE This table identifies to the system dialling rules the special feature codes used to activate central office custom calling features such as CID Block and call waiting disable The special feature codes can be used on a per call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming There is a maximum of ten 10 entries available each of which may be up to four digits long TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify to the system numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions This bypass includes Toll restriction Trunk access and forced authorization or account codes Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long OVRD USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 709 PBX ACCESS CODE Display shows
249. esent any digit The Toll Restriction Wild Character assignment MMC 704 is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction When all entries used LAST ENTRY is displayed DIAL PLAN This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern 1 7 8 This pattern is used by MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE to determine the correct billing according to MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled the system checks MMC 747 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call EXAMPLES When a station user dials a number the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find a match If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1 13 1305 and 1401 1305 is the closest match and this entry will be selected If 1305 15 dialled and this MMC contains entries 1 13 13056 and 1401 no action will be taken until the station user dials another digit If the next digit is 6 the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be selected but if the next digit is anything other than 6 the 13 entry is the closest match Whenever a new entry is added the system will sort all entries in numerical order because this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits Wild cards are checked after exact digits If 1813 and 18 are entered the system will check 1813 first If no match is found it will check 18 Page 2 306 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Pr
250. ess Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA BLANK MESSAGE RELATED ITEMS MMC 611 TEXT MESSAGE STATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 33 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 118 CONFERENCE GROUP Allows the system administrator or technician to set one touch conference group using GCONF key for any station One station can use up to 5 conference groups and each group can be set 5 member In MMC 612 Conference Group Station set USED station only uses this feature In case of a large LCD phone system set to USED automatically On conference member allows both internal station or station group number and outgoing access code plus external telephone number Conference group names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the group name is SAMSUNG press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the bottom left programmable button will change the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right NO It COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL lt gt 0 X DIAL 1 Sp
251. ess Transfer button and enter 812 Display shows 2 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Volume button to select Yes or No and press Right Soft button SI U Jg DISPLAY ELECT COUNTRY ndefined ELECT COUNTRY EFAULTING SYSTM RE YOU SURE NO WARNING if you select YES this will restart the system and all data make default 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA According to MCP2 DIP S W RELATED ITEMS All MMC Page 2 350 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 813 HOTEL OPERATION Allows the system installer to enable the HOTEL feature PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 813 HOTEL OPERATION Display shows DISABLE 2 Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE HOTEL OPERATION ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO HOTEL OPERATION CHANGE NOW NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO HOTEL OPERATION ARE YOU SURE NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right S
252. ext route 05 VMAA FORWARD ON This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be forwarded to voice mail When Permits forward to voice mail When OFF No forward to voice mail 07 NGT PASSCODE ON When ON the steps verifying the RING PLAN passcode will be added in Ring Plan change 08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF When the station is set to OFF the station will not print intercom calls on SMDR 09 FWD DLY USE OFF When the station is set to ON if the station has no answer forward number without no answer forward set then a call both ringing original extension and no answer forward number when a incoming call is directed to the station and the station does not answer until no answer forward time 10 FORWARD OVRD OFF When the station is set to ON if the station call to forwarded station the call will not forward 11 RECL TO OPER OFF When the station is set to ON if the station transfer a call and the destination doesn t answer the call will be recall to operator instead of the station 12 SLT PWR DISC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OFF When the normal phone is set to ON if the station receives real disconnect signal instead of busy tone or error tone In case of VMAA ports or DATA RING ports are not reference this option this type SLI ports are always receives real disconnect signal Page 2 75 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ
253. eypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 4 Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY HALT PROCESSING C ALL S ALL PROC HALT PROCESSING SEO HALT PROCESSING C ALL S ALL PROC HALT PROCESSING Se PROG Page 2 347 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 811 RESET SYSTEM Provides two methods of restarting the system The first method restarts the system and clears all memory The second method restarts the system only If clear all memory is selected only the default data will return Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC If the system is restarted all voice data connections are dropped If memory is cleared all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status 0 RESET SYSTEM System reset only with Smart Media read 1 CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with Smart Media read 2 FAST RESTART System reset only without Smart Media read PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press
254. fault SLT 3501 3546 DGP 3401 3480 11 MGI DIAL NO This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 3801 38xx 12 IP STN DIAL NO This is where IP based station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 3201 3299 13 MOBILE DIAL NO This is where wireless IP based station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 3301 3348 14 VOIP NET DIAL NO This is where Samsung proprietary switch to switch VoIP networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 8301 8380 15 H323 TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP H 323 trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 8401 8480 16 SIP TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 8501 8580 FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD Page 2 262 COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 2 ABAND BARGE CAMP DIAL 3 DGPALM DGPALM FAUTO DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG DIAL 5 LCR LCR LCR DIAL 6 MCID NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SELFID DIAL 8 UA UA VDIAL DIAL 9 WAKEUP WAKEUP WAKEUP WAKEUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Feature Code Assignments and Default FEATURE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION ABAND 64 ABANDONED CALL ABS NONE ABSENCE ABW NONE AGENT BUSY WRAP UP AC
255. ge 2 334 DISPLAY TENANT GROUP TENANT GROUP vc eu et A TENANT GROUP Urb sp ON NE TENANT GROUP TENANT GROUP rd SAMSUNG Electronics OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 804 SYSTEM I O PARAMETER Provides a means of assigning a system I O port for use with one of the service types detailed below A system has two SIO ports defined as IOM ports 2 and 3 and an optional modem port defined as port 5 In order for remote programming to work correctly the modem port must be assigned as PCMMC 0 SERVICE Service Type 00 NOT USE not used 01 PCMMC Connects PCMMC 02 SMDR SMDR print 03 UCD REPT UCD report 04 UCD SMDR UCD report and SMDR print 05 CTI Connects CTI 06 CTI SMDR Connects CTI with SMDR data 07 CTI UCD Connects CTI with UCD data 08 CTI S U Connects CTI with SMDR data and UCD data 09 TRAFFIC Call Traffic data print 10 TRF SMDR Call Traffic data and SMDR print 11 ALARM System Alarm report 12 ALM TRAF System Alarm data and Call Traffic data print 13 PERI UCD Periodic UCD report 16 HM REPT Hotel Motel report Hotel Motel related 17 PMS PMS data print Hotel Motel related 18 PMS SMDR PMS data and SMDR print Hotel Motel related 19 BD PMS Connects Bi directional PMS Hotel Motel related 27 UCD VIEW UCD view data print MMC 860 enab
256. ght Soft button 4 Dial 0 9 for selects state 205 EXEC STATE OR IN A MEETING Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 44 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING Used to open enable and close disable customer level programming If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC the error message NOT PERMIT will be displayed A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC Each digit can be 0 9 When opened this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Select open or closed KEYPAD Used to enter passcode SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC TRANSFER Exit Programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 200 ENABLE CUS PROG Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter passcode ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE Correct code shows ENABLE CUS PROG DISABLE Incorrect code shows ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE ERROR 3 Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE CUS PROG ENABLE ENABLE or DISABLE and press Right Soft button OR Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE 4 Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry 201 CUS PASSC
257. ght Soft button to return to step 4 9 2794296 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 612 CONFERENCE GROUP STATION MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 35 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per station basis Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name number first or no display depending on the type of call Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options 0 NODISPLAY No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed 1 NUMBER FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will be displayed first 2 NAME FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the CLIP translation table MMC 728 CLIP does not provide names PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 119 201 CID DISP Display shows first station NUMBER FIRST 2 Enter station number e g 205 205 CID DISP OR NUMBER FIRST Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press the Right Soft
258. gram 812 Program the national standard change needs to be used please call the service company assigned by Samsung to get an expert s advice SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION sui Document Content and Organization ss CONVENTIONS Ree tee Ate dese Rr ET ent deer ters eee Il Console Screen Output iiser eee reve eio depen Il References eere tu en Il REVISION HISTORY e Hl SAFETY CONCERNS NYIugg ce V GI mE VI CHAPTER 1 Before Programming 1 Introduction to Programming sise 1 1 1 1 Technician Level Program ss 1 1 1 2 Operator Level 7 nennen nennen 1 1 1 3 Station Level Program 1 1 2 Phone Buttons 2 5 ee nn nt dem entre 1 2 2 1 05 4000 Series phones pp 1 3 2 2 DS ITP 5000D Series Phones 1 4 3 Cautions in Programming 2 eon eene eee een enun aeo eene aaa ar Ense DRY 1 6 AM uie EB 1 7 4 1 Station Level Programming 1 7 42 Operator Level Programming pp 1 8 4 3 Technician Level Programming 1 13 5 Overview of Programming Procedure sise 1 15 SAMSUNG Elect
259. group defined in MMC 601 Before using this feature make sure that you are not violating any state or federal laws Some states require that the recorded party be notified SAMSUNG is not responsible for use of this feature WARNING PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to delete an entry Page 2 314 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 752 Display shows 2 Dial station number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial mailbox number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial VM number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Dialcall type via dial keypad 0 L 1 00r2 B OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY AUTO RECORD STN 20 1 MB NONE AUTO RECORD STN 20 1 MB NONE AUTO RECORD STN 20 AUTO RI
260. hange the version by downloading new version program stored Smart Media card to MCP2 SCP2 LCP2 or TEPRI card PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 818 PGM DOWNLOAD Display shows MPP MPPLV203 PGM 2 Press Volume button to select program type PGM DOWNLOAD and press Right Soft button to move cursor SPP SPP V203 PGM 3 Press Volume button to select YES and LAN PGM press Right Soft button to move cursor DOWNLOAD NOW NO If you select MCP program download the system will restart 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 819 SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL Page 2 356 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 819 SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL This MMC uses display file sizes and clear file on Smart Media card PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right HOLD Clear Smart Media file ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 819 STARTUP PRE Display shows 52 79288 bytes 2 Press Volume button to select program type and MPPLV203 PGM press Hold button to move cursor delete 52 6783488 bytes selection 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO MPPLV203 PGM OR D
261. has been set If a RTO key is available it will also flash 4 Ifthe alternate greeting is not activated but the ring plan is changed the system will remain in the selected ring plan until the next scheduled ring plan change Ifthe alternate greeting is activated the system will remain in the existing ring plan or the selected ring plan until the alternate greeting is manually deactivated 5 implement ring plan changes and or the alternate greeting the caller must enter the number or passcode that implements the special key program After the passcode is entered the caller must enter 2 digits The first digit selects the desired ring plan to change to 1 6 or 0 for no change The second digit activates the alternate message 0 for no alternate message or 1 for alternate message Page 2 282 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Example Caller dials into the system and is answered by the AA card The caller then input the special code or password 4822 The caller then dials 3 to select ring plan 3 and then dials 1 to turn on the alternate greeting The system now ring according to ring plan 3 Ring plan 3 is directed to the AA card and the caller is now answered by the alternate greeting PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to
262. he time a key must be held down before the key press is repeated LONG KEY REPEAT 300 0 2500 MSEC This timer controls the time between repeated digits on a long key press MCL DELAY TIME 4 1 8 SEC When outgoing call routes the MCL line dialling will be paused during this timer Awailable in U K only MS LED ON TIME 10 1 10 SEC This timer controls the duration a Manual Signalling key will remain on after use OFF HOOK RING INT 15 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped on call OHVA ANSWER TIME 10 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time duration of an OHVA call before automatic rejection PAGE TIME OUT 20 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page announcement PAGE TONE TIME 500 100 2500 This timer controls the duration of tone MSEC burst heard over the page prior to the page announcement PARK RECALL TIME 45 0 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator PC MMC LOCK TIME 5 1 60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity drops the link if no action is created by PCMNC and returns the system back to Secure program status PERI UCD REPORT 5 3 99 SEC This timer is the interval that a periodic UCD report is provided to an SIO port POWER DOWN TIME 2000 500 9900 This timer monitors the power to the ROM MSEC pack to begin shutdown status SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Pr
263. he voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the VMAA port Default No CALL TYPE ID This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string and can identify any of the following call types CALL TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 DIRECT CALL 1 A call originating directly from another station in the System 1 ALL FWD CALL 2 This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD ALL set 2 BSY FWD CALL 3 This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD BUSY set 3 NOA FWD CALL 4 This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER set 4 RECALL 5 A call is recalling the VM AA port after being transferred and not answered 5 DIR TRK CALL 6 A Trunk Line call has gone directly to VM AA e g trunk 717 DIL to VM AA 6 OVERFLOW 7 A call has OVERFLOWED to the port from station group 7 DID CALL 8 A DID call has called the VM AA port 8 MESSAGE CALL 9 A message button or message reply feature code has been used to call the VM AA port SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 271 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRESS TONE ID These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port in place of regular progress tones For example when a VMAA port goes off hoo
264. his trunk 01 LCR ENABLE OFF This option determines whether the system will or will not route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR routing tables 03 PERI UCD RPT OFF Periodic UCD Information provider Enables UCD Statistics data on a per UCD group basis to print out on the IO port which has been set as PERI UCD in real time every 3 99 seconds This allows the information to be interfaced and manipulated by an external package or third party provided software 04 CID CODE INS OFF When ON the system will insert the country code when receiving CID information This feature can use the CID display call back feature 05 DISA MOH OFF When ON outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the caller dials a digit 06 TRANSFER MOH OFF When ON outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of ring back tone from the time a transfer is completed until the call is answered by an internal party 08 DID BSY ROUT OFF When ON a DID call directed to a busy station will re route to the destination MMC 406 for that trunk if CW is set to OFF in MMC 714 If the CW option is set to ON the call will camp on When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF the call will re route to the operator 09 ALARM MOH ON When ON if station user answer alarm ring will hear station MOH instead of dial
265. his time CO CONFIRM TIME 3 0 250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIM type the outgoing call will be disconnected after this timer or the outgoing caller will hear the confirm tone every this time CO CO 20 1 250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an DISCONNECT unsupervised conference when it expires both trunks are disconnected CONFIRM TONE TM 1000 100 2500 The tone heard when a feature is activated or MSEC deactivated CRD TONE INT TM 30 0 250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by all the parties in a recorded conversation The range for the tone is 001 every second to 255 every 255 seconds A value of 000 means no tone Requires SVMi card DIAL PASS TIME 3 0 25 SEC This timer monitors the duration of time before connecting the transmit of the phone to the trunk side of an outgoing call DISA DISCONNECT 30 1 250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a DISA call DISA LOCK OUT 30 1 250 MIN This timer controls the duration of time a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired MMC 500 Page 2 164 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming TIMER NAME DEFAULT RANGE DESCRIPTION UNIT DISA NOANS DISC 30 0 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a DISA call i
266. hnician Program Mode Setting enter the tenant number to be programmed Make the program number selectable state If the Speaker button is pressed the program selection mode appears Or if the Transfer button is pressed the programming state ends and the pause state begin Select a program Enter the program number Or select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button Or Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number Start programming the corresponding program SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 15 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Cy This page is intentionally left blank Page 1 16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 2 Programming In this chapter how to use each program will be discussed according to each program list First you set the phone in the programmable state then either set or change the value according to the corresponding programming procedure To set the phone in the programmable state see the Overview of Programming Procedure of chapterl in this guide SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 1 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 100 STATION LOCK Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously The three options are as follows 0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station 1 LOCKED O
267. ht entries on a trunk basis and each entry consists of the following fields DIGIT Digits to be received There is a maximum of 16 digits RING 1 6 These numbers correspond to the six ring plan destinations for this MSN The destinations can be either stations or station groups CALL WAIT Toggles YES or NO if YES then the call will be camped on at busy destination while NO gives busy indication OPTION if Accept then the selected destination party will be alerted If Reject then the call will be cleared value for one of the two ports the value for the other port will be changed For each BRI access two adjacent ports are assigned You need only change the automatically PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL Page 2 144 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 421 Display shows 2 Enter trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN PORT and press Right Soft button to move Cursor 3 Enter the location 1 8 e g 4 OR Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter digits to be translated e g 4603881 via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move to the destina
268. hter Board 3 of MCP MCP SW Shows the DIP S W status of MCP C1 POWER B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet 1 CxSy VPM Shows the VPM board status of Voice Mail Card CxSy SW Shows the DIP S W status of TEPRI card SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 409 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS Display shows MCP D BD 1 ESM 2 Press Volume button to view options SYSTEM OPTIONS IMC 2 TEM 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 410 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS This MMC lists the date time and entry location of the last eight times that technician programming was accessed This will allow a technician to determine if there was unauthorised access to system programming and where this access occurred The information stored in this log will consist of 2 elements the date and time it occurred at and the access location There are 4 types of access location information as described below NNNN This would be the extension number of a phone that had ac
269. ibed above and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY 201 STN NAME 205 STN NAME 205 STN NAME SAM SMITH Page 2 9 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 105 STATION SPEED DIAL Allows the system administrator or technician to program the personal speed dial locations assigned to a station This must be done for single line telephones because these stations cannot access programming Each station may have up to 50 locations or bins assigned to it in MMC 606 Assign Speed Block The speed dial bins are numbered 00 49 Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial These dial digits may consist of 0 9 and If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number it will automatically insert the separator PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry B Used to insert a flash code C Used to insert a pause code D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code E Used to mask unmask following digits shows a
270. ibute There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 99 members per group One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group If necessary delete the trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access WARNING PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 603 9 GROUP Display shows MODE SEQUENTIAL 2 Enter in valid trunk group e g 9 9 TRK GROUP OR MODE SEQUENTIAL Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Press Right Soft button to change mode 9 GROUP OR MEMBER 01 NONE Press Volume button to change mode to member 4 Press Right Soft button to move cursor to 9 GROUP number of member and enter valid member MEMBER 05 NONE number e g 05 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 195 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Enter valid trunk number e g 729 9 GROUP OR MEMBER 01 729 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Repeat steps 1 5 to remove trunk from group 9 if necessary 7 Press
271. iceServ 500 system or damage to the phone please call your Authorised Samsung Reseller Document Content and Organization This programming guide is composed of a total of 2 chapters Each chapter is introduced as follows CHAPTER 1 Before Programming This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the buttons of digital phone and cautions CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page Introduction OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Conventions The following special paragraphs are used in this document to point out information that must be read This information may be set off from the surrounding text but 1s always preceded by a bold title in capital letters WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death WARNING or serious injury CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or CAUTION moderate injury It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference Console Screen Output The lined box with Courier New font will be used to distinguish between the main content and console output screen text Bold Courier New font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the console screen Reference
272. ich slot to address press C 1 5 6 P 2 16 Volume button to make selection 16 DLID16 DLI OR Use the dial pad to make a selection e g Slot 6 and press Right Soft button SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 341 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Press Volume button to make selection or use C l 5 6 21161 DIAL to select 1 yes 0 RESET CARD NO 5 Press Volume button to make selection or use C 1 5 6 21161 the DIAL to select 1 yes 0 ARE YOU SURE NO and press Right Soft button to return to Step 1 Continue to add cards as shown in step 2 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN Page 2 342 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL Allows the system administrator to set the level of phone volume I 4 O D KEY TONE VOL SIDETONE VOL HANDSET TX MIC TX LEVEL NOISE GUARD NOISE THRES ALC THRES TX RX THRES TX RX COMP MIN RX VOL 28D Only LINE VOLUME SPEAKERER VOLUME NOR LP ATTEN MIC LP ATTEN ACOU DECOUPL ELEC DECOUPL T R RATIO R T RATIO CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This MMC should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scr
273. ific functions or usage while programming Generally these buttons perform specific functions that you set for each corresponding button When MMC programming other functions programmed on the programmable buttons are as follows VOLUME Search the selected items KEYPAD Confirm the status SOFT BUTTONS Move the cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 1 3 CHAPTER 1 Before Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 SPEAKER Save data and proceed to the next program HOLD Erase the previously entered item Select either a capital letter or small letter B Select either a Korean character or English character TRANSFER Enter the programming code 2 3 DS ITP 5000D Series Phones There are several DS ITP 5000D series phones such as DS 5038D DS 5021D DS 5014D ITP 5021D ITP 5014D as shown in the figures below LCD Display Programmable Buttons 21 Soft buttons Scroll Button Telephone Status Indicator Volume Buttons Redial Button Programmable Buttons 17 Dial Buttons Microphone Speaker Button SI Conference Button Hold Button Transfer Button Figure 1 2 DS 5038D phone LCD Display Programmable Buttons 21 Soft buttons Scroll Button Telephone Status Indicator Volume Buttons oS Redial Button A Zu Los GES gt Navigation Buttons lt gt 5 ESD Dial Buttons SES
274. ing PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 106 201 SPEED NAME Display shows 00 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 SPEED NAME OR 00 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor If selected station has no speed dial bins the 305 SPEED NAME display will be as shown and a new station may SPDBLK NOT EXIST be selected 3 Dial speed dial location e g 01 205 SPEED NAME OR 01 Press Volume button to scroll through location numbers and press Right Soft button to move Cursor 4 Enter the location name using the procedure 205 SPEED NAME described above and press Right Soft button to 01 98AM SMITH return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 13 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 107 KEY EXTENDER Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to phone station In addition it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys
275. ion port This is a READ ONLY MMC 0 PORT Cabinet 1 3 Slot 1 9 Port 1 16 1 TYPE Phone Type 2 PICKUP GROUP None 01 99 3 SGR Station Group Number 4 BOSS SECR None 1 4 5 PAGE None Page Zone 0 4 6 COS NO COS 1 30 per Ring Plan 01 06 9 TENANT GROUP Tenant Group Number 1 2 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 108 201 STN STATUS Display shows first station 2 Dial station number e g 205 iesu a Los S eL PORU ZC Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 9 to select station status type 205 STN STATUS OR OUR Press Volume button to select status and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA PORT FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION TYPE DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE PICKUP GRP NONE SGR NONE BOSS SECR NONE PAGE ZONE NONE COS NUMBER 01 IN ALL RING PLANS TENANT 1 RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY
276. ious entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 25 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 113 201 VIEW MEMO Display shows 1 2 Press Right button to move cursor and 205 VIEW MEMO memo via dial keypad using procedure above 1 NEED BREAD 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 26 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 114 PHONE VOLUME Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume off hook ring volume handset receive volume speaker volume background music volume and page volume for any or all phones 0 RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 1 OFF RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped on to your phone There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 2 HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 3 SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting f
277. k to originate or transfer a call instead of hearing normal dial tone it will hear DTMF BA Progress tones can greatly increase the efficiency of a VMAA system because it is easier and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy ring back or DND tone Progress tones can identify any of the following TONE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 DIAL TONE NO Dial Tone 1 BUSY TONE NO Busy Tone RINGBAK TONE NO Ring back Tone DND NO MORE NO DND or No More Call Button Error HDSET ANSWER NO Off Hook Answer ANSWER On Hook Answer GENERAL RULES I Page 2 272 201 is talking to a trunk and presses TRANSFER plus the station number but the station is forwarded to VM AA and VM AA answers When this happens if 201 presses TRANSFER again to return to the trunk the VM AA port is not on hold It is disconnected A VM AA port leaves a message indication for a station When the station returns the message any available port in the VM AA group should ring not only the one that left the message A VM AA port leaves a message for a station When the station returns the message the MESSAGE LED is not automatically turned off If a VM AA system turns on the MESSAGE LED the VM AA system must turn it off If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled the system sends regular call progress tones When a VM AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE ANNOUNCE mode the phone will be forced
278. l compare received digits from AA card a Number conflicts like 2 and 23 or 56 and 567 are allowed in translation table after AA TRANS time and transfer to the proper destination Entries in the translation table will also provide the following features which are useful if a mailbox owner does not have a telephone on the system but does have a SVMi voice mailbox If a caller dials nnn he will leave a message directly in the mailbox specified in the destination If a caller dials nnn he will log into the mailbox specified in the destination If the translation table contains an entry like nnn D D is selected using the fourth Soft button callers dialling nnn will leave a message directly in the mailbox specified in the destination NOTES ABOUT CHANGING RING PLANS AND ALTERNATE GREETING MANUAL SERVICE 1 When the phone system changes ring plans AA greetings will also change as programmed in MMC 733 2 When the AA alternate greeting passcode is entered the caller may input a digit to change the ring plan This means that a customer who wants to put the system in a different ring plan can call in remotely and do it 3 When the alternate greeting passcode is entered the system will allow to select a ring plan If a RP ring plan key is programmed on the system it will FLASH The normal status of this light in a ring plan is on steady A flashing RP key corresponding to the ring plan indicates the remote ring plan
279. l day number 0 6 e g 2 OR Press Volume button to select day and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter room cost rate 001 999 e g 090 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA rates are 100 90 RELATED ITEMS MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY RM COST RAT SUN 100S s RM COST RAT TUE 100 RM COST RAT TUE 1005 090 Page 2 329 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Used to open and close technician level programming If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC the error message will be displayed A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC Each character can be digits 0 9 When opened this MMC enables access to all MMCs PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 800 ENABLE TECH PROG Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter passcode ENABLE TECH PROG PASSCODE Correct code shows ENABLE TECH PROG DISABLE TENANT 1 Incorrect code shows ENABLE TECH PROG PASSCODE ERROR 3 Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable ENABLE TECH PROG OR ENABLE TENANT 1 Press Vo
280. l pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press 7 four times to get the letter S Press 2 once to get Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing A button changes the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right NOTI COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 0 lt gt gt DIAL 1 Space 7 DIAL 2 A DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 44 72 lt lt lt gt a DIAL 9 DIAL I SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 241 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 The button can be used for the following special characters space amp n gt A 9 29 5 T gt lt gt 5 a s 5 rt S 2 and PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 714 DID DIGIT 001 Display shows DGT 2 Enter valid index numb
281. lay shows the first available option NONE 2 Enter MGI dial number 3801 MGI USER OR NONE Press Volume button to select an MGI port and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter MGI user dial number 3801 MGI USER OR NONE Press Volume button to select an MGI user and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 214 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MC 615 MGI GROUP MC 616 MGI USER MC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MC 837 SIP OPTIONS MC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MC 840 IP SET INFORMATION MC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS 56555556565 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 215 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 700 COPY COS CONTENTS This MMC allows the technician to duplicate a class of service to make it easier to have multiple similar classes of service PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC KEY Used to advance MMC 701 ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 700 Display shows 2 Dial selected COS to copy e g 05 OR Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor and advance to next step 3 Dial t
282. le lines to have ICM ringing Trunk Line ringing and data secure With the many types of external ringing devices all configurations can be met devices will also have a positive disconnect signal Do not make VM AA ports data this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration 0 ICM RING Follows normal SLI ring cadence 1 CO RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence 2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and not supports off hook ring PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 208 209 RING TYPE Display shows ICM RING 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 RING TYPE OR ICM RING Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 2 or 0 to select port type e g 2 205 RING TYPE OR DATA RING Press Volume button to select option and press LEFT or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ICM RING RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 56 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE Designates to which phone an add on module AOM is assigned There is no limit to
283. lect the mode of the Trunk line If the PBX mode 15 chosen this allows PBX access codes to be recognized thus allowing more complete toll restriction call barring This mode is assigned on a per trunk basis PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 401 701 PBX LINE Display shows CO LINE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 PBX LINE OR CO LINE Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move OR ALL PBX LINE Press ANS RLS button to select ALL 3 Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for Trunk Line 704 PBX LINE OR PBX LINE Use Volume button to scroll through options Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNK LINES RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 109 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE Used to determine the dialling type of each Trunk line There are three options 0 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF 1 DIAL PULSE rotary dial 2 R2 Frequency R2MFC PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selection
284. lections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 121 201 LANGUAGE Display shows ENGLISH 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 LANGUAGE OR ENGLISH Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL LANGUAGE Press ANS RLS button to select all stations 3 Dial 00 10 for language required 205 LANGUAGE OR GERMAN Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Page 2 40 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA ENGLISH RELATED ITEMS MULTIPLE LANGUAGE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 41 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED Used to set the Smart news display speed This timer is only related to the Smart News PC Application Package PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 122 201 CALL SPEED Display shows first station 03 gt 2 Enter station number e g 205 205 CALL SPEED
285. led only 28 UV SMDR UCD view data and SMDR print MMC 860 enabled only 29 UV CTI Connects CTI with UCD view MMC 860 enabled only 30 REMO N A Connects Remote M amp A 1 BAUD Baud Rate Speed 0 4800 bps 1 9600 bps 2 19200 bps 3 38400 bps SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 335 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAR LENG Character Length 7 7 bits 8 8 bits PARITY Parity Bit 0 NONE 1 ODD 2 EVEN RETRY COUNT Retry count 01 99 STOP BIT Stop Bit 1 1 BIT 2 2 BIT WAIT TIME Wait Time 0 99900 ms for ENQ ACK 0 3600 sec for NORMAL DTR CHECK Disconnect check on off 0 NONE 1 ODD 2 EVEN PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD SPEAKER HOLD ACTION l Page 2 336 Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right Used to advance next MMC Used to clear entry when valid Press Transfer button and enter 804 Display shows Enter desired port via dial keypad e g 2 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter desired parameter via dial keypad e g 1 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor DISPLAY SrO ORE SERVIC E PC MMC Gas 3 0 TU 2 SERVIC E SMDR BAUD 9 SHS 600 5 SAMSUNG Electronics Co
286. ll if the caller makes no response this is also the destination for rotary dial callers This can be another station station group or plan Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two digits 01 12 The default value is 500 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 287 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 INVALID DESTINATION Determines the destination for the call if the caller dials invalid digits after the retry counter has expired This destination can be another station station group or plan Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two digits 01 12 The default value is 500 NOTE ABOUT TRUNK SIGNALLING UCD is designed to hold a call until an agent is available It is therefore essential that a customer gets a disconnect from the Trunk Line when a caller hangs up If not the call may be held in the UCD loop until answered This could be a long time and when an agent finally does answer there would be no one there PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Used to enter P on destination field ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 733 AA PLAN PROG 01 Display shows PLAN MSG1 49 2 Enter AA plan number via dial keypad AA PLAN PROG 05 OR PLAN MSG1 49 Press Volume button to select a plan number and press Right Soft button to mo
287. ll stations LCR CLASS 3 Dial 1 8 to select class type e g 3 205 LCR CLASS OR LCR CLASS 3 Press Volume button to select class type and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA LEAST COST ROUTING COS 1 RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 91 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 312 ALLOW CALLER ID Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be send or displayed at with LCD phones PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 312 201 CID ANI Display shows RCV YES SND YES 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CID ANI OR RCV YES SND YES Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL CID ANI Press ANS RLS button to select ALL RCV YES SND YES 3 Dial 0 or 1 to select receive option 205 CID ANI OR RCV YES SND YES Press Volume button to select receive option and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial 0 or 1 to select send option 205 CID ANI OR RCV YES SND YES Press Volume button to select send option and press Righ
288. llows several types of call forwarding FORWARD ALL FORWARD NO ANSWER FORWARD BUSY and FORARD DND There is an additional option FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time provided that destinations have been entered for both 0 FORWARD CANCEL 1 FORWARD ALL CALL 2 FORWARD BUSY 3 FORWARD NO ANSWER 4 FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER 5 FORWARD types forwarding can be set external number In MMC 701 Class of Service if FORWARD is set OFF you cannot set call forward but can cancel it And if EXT FWD is set OFF you cannot set external number PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 102 201 FORWARD Display shows 0 FORWARD CANCEL 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 FORWARD OR 0 FORWARD CANCEL Press Volume button to select station and press RIGHT Page 2 4 Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Dial 0 to select forward type OR Press Volume button to select forward type and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial destination number e g 201 OR Press Volume button to select destination and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Diallfor YES 0 for NO OR P
289. lume button to select and press RIGHT Soft button to move tenant number and enter tenant number 1 2 4 Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry 801 TEC PASSCODE level SELECT PROG ID 5 Enter the MMC desired e g 209 209 AOM MASTER AOM NOT EXIST Page 2 330 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 6 Tolog out and return to MMC 800 press Volume button to select DISABLE OR Press Speaker button then TRANSFER to return to normal display Programming option will time out DEFAULT DATA DISABLE RELATED ITEMS MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 331 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician Program from its current value g The passcode is four characters long Each character can be digits 0 9 The current or old passcode is required for this MMC PROGRAM BUTTONS KEYPAD Used to enter passcodes SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 801 TECH PASSCODE NEW CODE 2 Enter new passcode TECH PASSCODE NEW 3 Enter new passcode again TECH PASSCODE VERIFY 4 If passcode is correct press RIGHT soft TECH PASSCODE key to continue and enter
290. m No Program Description MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL MNC 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC 206 BARGE IN TYPE MMC 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT MMC 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MNC 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT MMC 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS MMC 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS MMC 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 222 FAX PAIR MMC 224 WAKE UP ANNOUNCEMENT MMC Program No Program Description MNC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION MNC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MNC 302 PICKUP GROUPS MNC 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY MNC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MNC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE MNC 306 HOT LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION MNC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MNC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 MMC Program No CHAPTER 1 Before Programming Program Description MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MNC 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC 316 COPY STN TRK USE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION U
291. m is assigned external tone source instead of system tone There are 7 types of tone for external tone source BUSY TONE DIAL TONE DND NO MORE TRANSFERER TONE MSGWAIT TONE ERROR TONE RGBACK TONE SU BR D A PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 514 BUSY TONE Display shows TONE 2 Enter the system tone number 0 6 DIAL TONE OR TONE Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial a number for external tone source DIAL TONE OR 372 Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to store 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA TONE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 186 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 515 ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE Allows the Technician to program the start dates and end dates of daylight saving time on a system for the current year and the next 9 years System will automatically add 1 hour to the system clock at 02 00 2 00 a m on the Start date and subtract 1 hour from the system clock at 02 00 2 00 a m on the End date PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through
292. m upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIALO lt gt 0 DIAL 1 Space 1 DIAL 2 A B C 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 96 5 DIAL 6 M N O 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 Page 2 326 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 8 T U V 8 DIAL 9 W x Y 2 9 DIAL The button can be used for the following special characters space amp gt 2 dE 5 7 lt gt h 5 1 A T f h 2s and PROGRAM KEY VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 761 Display shows Enter valid tax number e g 2 via dial button pad OR press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 0 for 00 1 for or 2 for T Inclusive VAT OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter in the tax rate or value via dial button pad OR Press Volume button to make selection If valid entry system advances cursor Ent
293. mation by force NORMAL mode Whenever the system wants to clear the registration of a DECT handset the deletion must be confirmed from the handset If the confirmation is successful the system clears the registered information If the confirmation fails the system cannot clear the information PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 738 Display shows 2 Enter DECT terminal number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Enter 0 for FORCED mode or 1 for NORMAL mode OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 8801 DECT CLEAR MODE FORCED 8801 DECT CLEAR MODE FORCED 8801 DECT CLEAR MODE NORMAL DI 8801 DECT CLEAR ECT CLEAR NO Page 2 297 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO 8801 DECT CLEAR OR CLR RECORDED NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press
294. ming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 615 MGI GROUP MMC 616 FIXED MGI USER MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS Page 2 392 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options The options set in this MMC are system wide There 9 option categories are list 0 PHONE VERSION Sets running IP based phone and new phone software version with the system Defaults are 0000 LARGE DGP Large LCD phone LARGE ITP Large LCD IP based phone 2LINE ITP2 line LCD IP based phone WIPM APPL Wireless IP based mobile phone software WIPM BOOT Wireless IP based mobile phone boot program WN 1 PHONE TFTP IP Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP address Default is 0 0 0 0 2 ITP REGISTRATION Defines the method that IP based phones use to registration themselves with the system 0 Defines the method that IP based phones use to registration themselves with the system Default is SYS PSWD 0 SYS PSWD System will authenticate the IP based phones with the value contained within parameter ITP REGISTRATION PSWD within this same MMC 1 ITP PSWD System will authenticate the IP based phones according to entries made in MMC 840 2 DISABL
295. nal ping test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 58 MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The MGI card has restarted because the system detects the card does response via network link External ping test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 59 MJE06 MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system detects the card DSP runs not correctly Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Pzz 60 MJE07 MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system Page 2 402 detects the card DSP runs correctly Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Pzz SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming CODE ALARM NAME DEFINITION MNF Minor Error Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving 61 MNF01 Card Out Acircuit card mounted in a universal slot has been removed from service or is not recognized by the system Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 62 MNF02 Card In Acircuit card mounted in a universal slot has been returned to service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 63 IPC Error Inter processor communication error has occurred Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 64 MNF04 Trunk Fault Out of service trunk detected loop detect Internal CODEC test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 65 5 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of service is now operational Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 66 MN
296. nce next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 721 201 SAVE KEY Display shows RESTORE 2 Enter desired station number e g 205 205 SAVE KEY OR RESTORE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Volume button to make function selection 205 SAVE KEY and press Right Soft button to enter and return to save step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 253 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific electronic phones AOM or 64 button module on the system For phones buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default For AOM s and 64 button DSS box s all buttons are set as DS keys by default Features are entered via dial pad keys by pressing the dial pad number the required number of steps to select the feature For example for OHVA the number 6 is pressed three times If the BOSS key is required press 2 for the first letter B and then use the Volume button to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ
297. nd disconnect the central office line DISA lines must be assigned to the Ring Plan s PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL trunks ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 410 701 123456 Display shows DISA LINE 000000 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 123456 OR DISA LINE 000000 Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button OR ALL 123456 Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks DISA LINE 000000 OR 3 Press VOL key Volume button to select a 704 123456 Ring Plan DISA LINE 001000 OR Using the dial pad press 1 to apply and 0 not to apply to a particular Ring Plan and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 124 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS NORMAL RELATED ITEMS MMC 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 125 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE Defines the type of signalling for each El trunk assigned to the card There are four kinds of trunks as detailed below There are three types
298. nd enter 744 ENABLE DECT REG Display shows PASSCODE _ 2 Enter passcode ENABLE DECT REG PASSCODE If the correct code is entered the display shows ENABLE DECT REG DISABLE If the SYSTEM ID in MMC 737 has not been ENABLE DECT REG set the following message will be displayed NO REG SYSTEM ID 3 Dial 1 for ENABLE 0 for DISABLE ENABLE DECT REG OR ENABLE Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA DISABLE RELATED ITEMS MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 743 DBS STATUS MMC 745 BSI RF CARRIER Page 2 304 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 745 BSI RF CARRIER A base station uses one of 10 channels FDMA technology This MMC is used to allow or deny the use of each channel carrier By default all carriers can be used by a base station Carrier can be used Carrier cannot be used PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 745 CARS 0123456789 The display shows the status of each carrier Se platelet sell eed 0 9 If 1 is shown below a carrier then this carrier can be used by the base s
299. nd press Right Soft button 3 Enterthe AA group number WAKE UP ANNOUNCE OR AA GROUP 520 Press Volume button to select and press RGHT Soft button to return to step 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 73 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA AA GROUP NONE MESSAGE NO NONE GROUP BUSY NONE RELATED ITEMS WAKE UP ANNOUNCEMENT FEATURE Page 2 74 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION Allows the following features to be enabled on a per station basis 00 OPTIONS ACCESS DIAL DEFAULT ON DESCRIPTIONS Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk group by dialling its directory number DN This selection should be turned to off when using LCR 01 MICROPHONE ON Allows all 12 and 24 button phones to be used in the speakerphone mode 02 OFF HOOK RING ON Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call 03 SMDR PRINT ON When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from this station the station will not print on SMDR This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park 04 TGRADV TONE ON When this feature is set to ON a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the n
300. nd remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday Dates are entered in a month day format For example July 4th would be 0704 One ring plan applies to all holidays PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 512 Display shows the Ring Plan 2 Press Right Soft button advance cursor Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan OR Use the dial pad to select a Ring Plan e g 2 3 Press the Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor 4 Press Volume button to scroll to Assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 5 Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button enter and advance cursor 6 Dial date using the dial pad for holiday e g 0704 7 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED FOLLOW RING PLAN 1 RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Page 2 184 DISPLAY RING PLAN FOLLOW 1 RING PLAN FOLLOW 2 RING PLAN FOLLOW 2 ASSIGN HOLIDAY Oils ASSIGN HOLIDAY 055 ASSIGN HOLLIDAY 05 0704 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 513 HOTEL TIMER This MMC is where the check out time for guest rooms and the room clean timers are set These are system wide timers that affects all
301. ndefinitely To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group even if the group has only one station in it 05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601 If a higher value is entered the display will show invalid entry In the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000 an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until itis answered The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers This will simulate a circular hunt group 06 UCD RECALL TIME After a caller has heard a UCD announcement he she will be placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires When the UCD recall timer expires the caller will again hear the UCD announcement The range is 00 99 The default is 10 07 MOH SOURCE This option determines what Music on Hold source the callers will be connected to between messages The choice is either an external source AA message defined in MMC 736 or a Built In Voice Mail Card message defined in MMC 756 08 WRAP UP TIME This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one This is to allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call before the nex
302. nels and seven 7 users or one 1 channel and five 5 users to the VDIAL card When changing channel size you will be prompted to clear RAM This is only for Voice Dialler not the system This will prevent accidental usage of pre recorded names It is advised that you clear RAM before assigning users in MMC 216 2CH 7USER 20BIN 7 USERS 1CH SUSER 40BIN 5 USERS PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 215 3551 VDIAL OPTN Display shows 2CH 7USER 20BIN 2 Enter Voice Dialler number e g 3551 3551 VDIAL OPTN via dial keypad 2CH 7USER 20BIN OR Press Volume button to select Voice Dialler and use Right Soft button to move cursor 3 DialO or 1 for Voice Dialler channel select 3551 VDIAL OPTN OR 1CH 5USER 40BIN Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA None RELATED ITEMS MMC 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 724 DIAL NUMBER PLAN Page 2 64 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Allows a station to be assigned to a channel of the VDIAL card
303. ni The button can be used for the following special characters space amp 3 33 5 7 lt gt i T t 25 gt 2 and SAMSUNG Electronics Ltd Page 2 277 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case A ACTION 4 Enter associated name as described above and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 press TRANSFER to exit OR Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE Press Transfer button and enter 728 Display shows first entry Dial entry number e g 0005 OR Use Volume button to scroll through entries and press Right Soft button to select entry Enter telephone number and press Right Soft button to advance name entry OR Enter telephone number and press LEFT Soft button to return to step 2 RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 ALLOW CID MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS Page 2 278 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DISPLAY TRANSLATIO 0001 TRANSLATIO 0005 TRANSLATIO 0005 DGT 3054264100 TRANSLATIO 0005 SAMSUNG TELECOM SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 730 AA RECORD GAIN Used to control A
304. nics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options The traffic report can be printed upon demand every hour at a programmed time of each day or up to three separate timed shifts Automatic printing will always clear the totals When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected the options are PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved CANCEL PRINTOUT The program return to previous menu if no report is ended When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected the options are AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are reset to 0 EVERY HOUR A Traffic report will be printed every hour TIME SHIFTS Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report traffic within certain times of a day A report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals are reset to 0 When a report is printed the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the last report stated as BEGINNING D amp T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING D amp T See the sample report at the end of this MMC If there are no trunks in a group the trunk group report for that group will not print PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME U
305. ns KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 220 209 ISDN SVC Display shows VOICE 2 Enter the station number e g 210 210 ISDN SVC OR VOICE Press Volume button to select station and press RGHT Soft button 3 Select service type 0 3 210 ISDN SVC OR AUDIO 3 1 Press Volume button to select option and press RGHT Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA VOICE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 69 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 221 EXTENSION TYPE This MMC enables station ports to be defined for a specific use Each telephone can be designated as being one of the five 5 following types These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type desired 0 NORMAL STATION This is the default setting The station will operate in the normal manner associated with this type of station Ports designated as VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC 1 GUEST SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check in features as a smoking room 2 GUESTNO SMOKING When a station is designated as this
306. numbers mean lower levels Default value is 0 2 TSW GAIN CONTROL Adjusts the tone sensitivity As shown below there are 8 types of matrix connections of the T Switch that adjusts the tone sensitivity Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0 in MMC 426 DGP phone SLT SLI phone ATRK Analog trunk DTRK Digital trunk DECT DECT terminal VOIP MGI port or IP based phone SVMi SVMi port WLI WLI port oO WHY Default values are followed I bo DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLI DGP gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 SLT gt 0 0 2 5 0 0 2 5 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 ATRK gt 0 0 0 0 1 9 6 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 DTRK gt 0 0 2 5 1 9 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 VOIP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 SVMi gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 WLI gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page 2 338 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This MMC should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 805 Display shows 2 Press Volume button to make selection 0 3 After selec
307. o review the available hardware without having to dismantle or power down the system to confirm if the hardware is mounted This is a READ ONLY MMC SYSTEM OPTIONS OfficeServ 500 L System MCP D BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board 1 of MCP MCP D BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board 2 of MCP MCP D BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board 3 of MCP MCP SW Shows the DIP S W status of MCP C1 POWER B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet 1 SCP D BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board 1 of SCP SCP D BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board 2 of SCP SCP D BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board 3 of SCP LCP1 ONLINE Shows the connection status of Cabinet 2 LCP C2 POWER B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet 2 LCP1 D BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board 1 of Cabinet 2 LCP LCP1 D BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board 2 of Cabinet 2 LCP LCP1 D BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board 3 of Cabinet 2 LCP LCP2 ONLINE Shows the connection status of Cabinet 3 LCP C3 POWER B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet 3 LCP2 D BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board 1 of Cabinet 3 LCP LCP2 D BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board 2 of Cabinet 3 LCP LCP2 D BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board 3 of Cabinet 3 LCP CxSy VPM Shows the VPM board status of Voice Mail Card CxSy SW Shows the DIP S W status of TEPRI card OfficeServ M System MCP D BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board 1 of MCP MCP D BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board 2 of MCP MCP D BD 3 Shows the Daug
308. o save and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS DAY RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 RING PLAN TIME Page 2 322 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 760 ITEM COST TABLE This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10 character name for the item There are a maximum of 100 entries 00 to 99 in the table with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and items 89 to 99 are reserved for other PMS stream items These item codes with the exception of codes 93 to 99 will appear on the guests bill at checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for The room bill when printed will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field will show the number dialled In addition to the name up to 8 of the tax codes or rates defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item PRE DEFINED CODES ITEM DESCRIPTION USE 00 Room Deposit This is the code used for pre pay room deposits 01 Phone Deposit This is the code used for pre pay phone deposits 02 88 User Assignable Code 89 W UP SET A wake up call was set 90 W UP ANS A wake up call was answered 91 W UP N ANS A wake up call was not answered 92 W UP CANCL A wake up call was cancelled 93 Check In A
309. o scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to previous step Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA RING PLANS 1 6 01 RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC 220 SECONDARY STATION Page 2 78 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 302 PICKUP GROUPS Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups There is a maximum of 99 pickup groups An unlimited number of members can belong to each group Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY l Press Transfer button and enter 302 201 PICKUP GRP Display shows PICKUP GRP NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PICKUP GRP OR PICKUP GRP NONE Use Volume button to select station number and press Right Soft button OR ALL PICKUP GRP Press ANS RLS button to select all PICKUP GRP 3 Dial pickup group number e g 05 205 PICKUP GRP OR PICKUP GRP 05 Press Volume button to selec
310. o the MMC 728 CID translation ADD CLI XLT NO table Press ANS RLS button and dial 1 for YES The speed dial name must be exist 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC 728 CLIP NAME TRANSLATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 227 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Allows an 11 character name to be entered for each system speed dial location This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature The directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial location by scanning its name Names are written using the keypad Each press of a key selects a character Pressing a different key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing A button changes the letter from upper case to lower case When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right NOT VOTE COUNT 1 2
311. of signalling associated with E amp M and DID channels 1 30 that are not used should have SIGNALLING programmed as UNUSED TRUNK LOOP BR 14301 NOT BR 14301 OPT COMMENTS BRAZIL L I ERICSSON 1 1914 FOR TEST BRAZIL L l ERICSSON 2 1914 FOR TEST RU LOOP RUSSIA L I O LOOP START E amp M IMMEDIATE COMMON E D I O IMMEDIATE START DELAYED COMMON E D I O DELAY ITU_WINK COMMON E D I O WINK START ITU_WINK_MPD COMMON E D I O WINK START WITH MPD BR_CONTINU BRAZIL E D CONTINUE BR_PULSED BRAZIL E D I O PULSED BR_R2_DIGIT BRAZIL E D I O R2 DIGITAL BR_BLD_160 BRAZIL I O ERICSSON 2 1914 14102 BR BLD 157 BRAZIL I O ERICSSON 2 1914 14102 BR 14102 NOT BRAZIL E I O ERICSSON 1 1914 BR 14102 OPT BRAZIL E ERICSSON 1 1914 RU ADSE RUSSIA E D I O PABX HARRIS UK RUSSIA E D 1 0 HARRIS PABX UK EM USER ROM RUSSIA E D 1 0 USER ROM AR WINK ARGENTINA E D MO WINK AR WINK MPD ARGENTINA E D I O WINK MPD CHINA NO1 CHINA E D NO 1 OF CHINA POL WINK MPD POLAND E D POLAND WINK MPD DID IMMEDIATE COMMON E D I O IMMEDIATE START DELAYED COMMON E D I O DELAY ITU_WINK COMMON E D I O WINK START ITU_WINK_MPD COMMON E D I O WINK START WITH MPD BR_CONTINU BRAZIL E D CONTINUE BR_PULSED BRAZIL E D I O PULSED BR_R2_DIGIT BRAZIL E D I O R2 DIGITAL RU_ADSE RUSSIA E D I O PABX RU_HARRIS_UK RUSSIA E D 1 0 HARRIS PA
312. oft button 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA DISABLE RELATED ITEMS Hotel Related MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 351 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY Provides a means to copy the customer database to the SMDB Smart Media card Data Base This enables the on board database SRAM to be copied to the SMDB and also allows the SMDB database to be copied to the on board database A daily save can be programmed to automatically save the on board data base to the SMDB This insures that an up to date database is always available in the case ofa catastrophic failure A daily save time of 00 00 means there is no save performed It is recommended to CLEAR the SMDB before the SRAM is copied to it When the SRAM is copied to the SMDB there is no interruption in service If the SMDB is copied to the SRAM the system will reset to accept the new data SMDB Smart Media card database SRAM MCP2 On Board database S mm dd yy hh mm Indicates the time the database was saved to the SMDB or the time the SRAM was last saved DAILY SAVE hh mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the SMDB A Smart Media Card of 16 MB or 32 MB must be installed in order to copy the on board database SRAM on to the Smart Media card SMDB PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to ent
313. ogramming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming TIMER NAME DEFAULT RASE DESCRIPTION UNIT RECALL DISCONECT 2 1 250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring before being disconnected RECALL WAIT TIME 15 0 250 SEC This is the time any recall hold or transfer continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator ROUTE OPTIMISE 5 0 250 SEC When the call is made via Q SIG signalling the route optimization is activated after this time SMDR START DP 30 1 250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary SMDR START DTMF 15 1 250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the phones The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same SYS HOLD RECALL 45 0 250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling back to the holding station This is a system wide timer Setting timer to 000 will defeat this feature and no recalling will take place TRANSFER RECALL 20 0 250 SEC This timer determines the time transferred calls ring before recalling This is a system wide timer TSW CONN DELAY 0 0 10 SEC When incoming trunk makes outgoing call to another trunk the system connects voice path after this time UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 0 990 SEC When an AA card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled this counter determines the maximum number of
314. ogramming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select all ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 746 COST DP 001 Display shows DIGIT 2 Dial CALL COST entry e g 005 COST DP 005 OR DIGIT Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter digit string via the dial keypad and COST DP 005 press Right Soft button DIGIT 1305 4 Enter DIAL PLAN 1 8 COST DP 005 OR CALL RATE NONE Press Volume button to select dial plan and press Right Soft button to save and move step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 433 COST RATE MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 307 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST RATE These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan There are eight call costing rates Each rate has the following data fields FIRST INTERVAL DURATION This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a fixed cost is applied The range is from
315. oll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 343 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 807 VOL CONTROL US24 Display shows KEY TONE VOL 1 2 Enter phone type via dial keypad VOL CONTROL EU24 OR KEY TONE VOL 1 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter volume item via dial keypad VOL CONTROL EU24 OR SIDETONE VOL 1 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter volume data via dial keypad VOL CONTROL EU24 OR HANDSET TX 6 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA DEPEND ON PHONE TYPE 21D KEY TONE VOL 1 SIDETONE VOL 1 HANDSET TX 4 MIC TX LEVEL 3 NOISE GUARD 8 NOISE THRES 1 ALC THRES 7 TX RX THRES 3 TX RX COMP 5 MIN RX VOL 6 Page 2 344 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming FX LINE VOLUME 3 SPKER VOLUME 14 NOR LP ATTEN 4 MIC LP ATTEN 4 ACOU DECOUPL 8 ELEC DECOUPL 8 T R RATIO 2 R T RATIO 2 RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 345 CHAPTER 2
316. omated Attendant A A card be installed in the system When a Wake Up call is answered the system will access the customized Wake Up message 1 48 that has been recorded in the AA card The end user will record this message and have the ability to change it when desired Auto Attendant operation The Wake Up message will have no default ROM message assigned to it However a ROM message 49 64 may also be assigned as the Wake Up message if desired This MMC has three options AA GROUP Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up call is answered This destination can be a any AA groups MESSAGE NO Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is answered This destination can be a custom recorded message 1 48 or one of the pre programmed messages 49 64 GROUP BUSY Determines which tone source will be connected when a AA group members are all busy This destination can be a NONE TONE or extern music on hold If NONE set then dial tone connected if TONE set then hold tone connected PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 224 WAKE UP ANNOUNCE Display shows AA GROUP NONE 2 Dial 0 1 or 2 for option select WAKE UP ANNOUNCE OR AA GROUP NONE Press Volume button to select option a
317. oment please recording 02 If you need a new message that says thank you for calling one moment please you can record this as recording 03 and play it as message 03 but this uses some of the RAM storage on the AA card An easier way is to link recordings 01 and 02 to produce message 03 This is the purpose of this MMC We simply tell the system that message 03 equals recording 01 plus recording 02 In this MMC the top line of the phone display indicates a message number and the bottom line indicates the recording numbers PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 734 AA MSG MATCH 01 Display shows 01 2 Enter message number via dial keypad MSG MATCH 05 OR 05 Press Volume button to select a message and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter one or more recording numbers and press MSG 05 Right Soft button to return step 2 26 14 45 12 02 Page 2 290 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA EACH MESSAGE IS EQUAL TO THE CORRESPONDING RECORDING RELATED ITEMS MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS MMC 733 AUTO ATTENDANT PLAN PROGRAMMING MMC 739
318. on and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS Page 2 384 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 836 H 323 GK OPTIONS Provides a means to set the H 323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional external industry standard H 323 network gatekeeper using Registration Admissions and Status signalling RAS The settings are system wide When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 00 GK CONNECTION This enables or disables the H 323 call to connect to a gatekeeper Default is DISABLE 01 GK ROUTING This enables or disables routing of calls through a gatekeeper Default is DISABLE 02 GKIP ADDRESS This is gatekeeper s IP address Default is 0 0 0 0 03 GK NAME This is alphanumeric name identifier of the gatekeeper An entry of 16 characters Default is Gatekeeper 04 ALTER GK IP ADDR This provide for an alternate gatekeeper address Default is 0 0 0 0 05 H 323 GATEWAY ID This is the H 323 identifier used by the MGI when registering with the gatekeeper This can be up to 32 characters Default is OfficeServ500 06 E 164 GATEWAY NO Thi
319. on status Enter another station or trunk OR Press transfer to exit Display status no connection l Display connection status with invalid trunk or Press Transfer button and enter 434 Enter invalid station or trunk number Display show INVALID DATA Enter another station or trunk OR Press transfer to exit station number l Press Transfer button and enter 434 Enter invalid station or trunk number Display show INVALID DATA Enter another station or trunk OR Press transfer to exit SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE DISPLAY STATUS 702 227 215 DISPLAY STATUS 702 216 gt DISPLAY STATUS 216 TOA 22 3 F DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE DISPLAY STATUS 702 NONE DISPLAY STATUS 702 NONE DISPLAY STATUS 201 DISPI INVA DISPI 201 IDLE LAY STATUS LID DATA LAY STATUS IDLE DISPLAY STATUS 201 DISPI INVA DESPA 201 IDLE LAY STATUS LID DATA LAY STATUS IDLE Page 2 157 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Display connection status with trunk or station number in maintenance busy 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 bu 2 Enter station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show connection status 725 MADE BUSY 3 Enter another station or trunk OR DISPLAY STATUS Press transfer to exit 725
320. options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC TRANSFER Used to exit programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 515 NO YY START END Display shows 00 2 Enter entry number e g 00 for current year NO YY START END OR 00 Press Volume button to select entry number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter year e g 03 for 2003 YY START END OR 00 03 Press Volume button to select year and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter start date in format MMDD NO YY START END e g 30 March would be 0330 00 03 0330 5 Enter the start date in format MMDD NO YY START END e g 26 October would be 1026 00 03 0330 1026 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 DATE AND TIME MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS AUTO UPDATE TIME SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 187 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 600 OPERATOR GROUP Display shows 1
321. or Enter desired extension number via dial keypad e g 205 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY FREE LIST SVSREM 2 FREE LIST SYSTEM 20 IET SYSTEM 20 FREE LIST 31 FREE LIST 15 OSR 20 180 2 199 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Enter valid number for bins FREE LIST 20 e g 0 5 for EXT or 00 50 for SYSTEM EXT205 5 OR Press Volume button to make selection OR Press Hold button to delete bin s 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SYSTEM 200 ENTRIES STATIONS 1 BLOCKS ASSIGNED RELATED ITEMS MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 106 STATION SPD NAME MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Page 2 200 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 607 UCD OPTIONS Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed MMC 601 must have already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities When a group overflow timer in MMC 601 expir
322. or conversations on the speaker phone of a phone There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest 4 BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest 5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 114 201 STN VOLUME Display shows RING VOLUME 4 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 STN VOLUME RING VOLUME 4 3 Press Volume button to select volume type 205 STN VOLUME SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd SPEAKER VOL 13 Page 2 27 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Press Volume button to select volume 05 STN VOLUME SPEAKER VOL 08 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA RING VOLUME 4 OFF HOOK RING VOLUME 4 HANDSET VOLUME 4 SPEAKER VOLUME 13 BGM VOLUME 13 PAGE VO
323. ot display station passcodes it can only reset them to default CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes The passcode is used to lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction call barring override and to access the DISA feature e Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION Press Transfer button and enter 101 Display shows 2 Dial phone number e g 205 OR Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right 3 Press HOLD to reset passcode 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL STATION PASSCODES 1234 RELATED ITEMS MMC 100 STATION LOCK SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY 201 PASSCODE PASSCODI 205 PASSCODE PASSCODI 205 PASSCODE PASSCODI E 1234 Page 2 3 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 102 CALL FORWARD Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered A
324. oup 07 DND CALL NO This option allows a message IN DND or OUT DND to be printed in the digits dialled column each time a station enters or leaves DND 08 WAKE UP CALL YES This option determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call will print on SMDR 09 DIRECTORY NONE This option allows the system administrator to enter a 16 NAME character name which will appear on the SMDR header 10 CALLER ID DATA YES This option can be selected to print Caller ID data received from the Central Office on incoming calls This option requires the use of a 132 column wide carriage printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print 11 ABANDON CALL YES If this option is set to YES unanswered calls for which CID information was received will print on SMDR 13 NO OF DIAL 0 If this option is set to a numeric value the selected last MASK digits of the number dialled field will be masked as SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd asterisks on the SMDR print out Maximum masked digits is 18 First 4 digits will not mask Page 2 267 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 OPTIONS DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 15 INCOMING NO If this option is set to YES the duration of calls ringing ANSWER before answered will print on SMDR 16 INTERCOM CALL NO This option determines whether intercom calls will print on SMDR 17 KEY MMC IN OUT NO If set to YES then the SM
325. owing special characters space gt lt gt m 2 C p T 15 gt and SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 193 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 602 500 SGR NAME Display shows 2 Dial group number e g 505 505 SGR NAME OR Press Volume button to make selection and press LEFT or Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter in name using above method and table 505 SGR NAME TELECOMS 4 Press LEFT or Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 404 TRUNK NAME MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Page 2 194 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups This is very useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans There are two different modes of operation 1 sequential and 2 distr
326. p the first message will immediately play For instructions on how to make these recordings see the User Instructions Section Auto Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution System Administration The default message is 61 I m sorry all stations are presently busy This message will only be played once for the caller 01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time see UCD Recall the caller will be played the second message For instructions on how to make these recordings see the User Instructions Section Auto Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution System Administration The default message is 62 I m sorry all stations are still busy This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue at an interval specified in the UCD Recall Timer below 02 EXIT CODE While the caller is hearing a message but not during MOH the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination see Final Destination The exit code is optional and does not need to be used If used the first and second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use 03 Page 2 202 RETRY COUNT The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a final destination after a programmable number of loops through the UCD message The range of this counter is 0 to 99 00 means that there is no retry counter and the calle
327. passed Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 46 MJD15 BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 4T MJD16 BRI DL Recovery ABRI data link is back in service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 48 MJD17 RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Page 2 401 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CODE ALARM NAME DEFINITION MJD DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault 49 MJD18 E1 Restart The E1 card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 50 MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 51 MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 52 MJD21 PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 53 MJD22 PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE MGI Error MGI card Fault 54 MJEO1 MGI Restart The card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 55 MJE02 MGI Stop The MGI card has stoped Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 56 MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 57 MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects the card doesn t response via network link Exter
328. ply to the COS Classes of service are numbered 01 30 Default is COS 01 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME KEYPAD U U sed to scroll through options sed to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 301 201 STN COS Display shows first station 1 01 2 01 3 01 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 STN cos OR 1 01 2 01 3 01 Use Volume button to scroll through stations Press Right Soft button to advance step 3 OR Use Volume button to scroll through stations and press Left Soft button to advance Step 4 OR ALL STN COS Press ANS RLS button to select all stations 1 01 2 01 3 01 3 Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad 205 STN cos OR 1 01 2 01 3 01 Press Volume button to make selection OR press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter ring plan class of service e g 05 205 STN cos OR 1505 2501 2501 Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance the next ring plan OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 77 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Enter the next ring plan class of service 205 STN COS e g 05 OR 1 05 2 01 3 01 Use Volume button t
329. pplications Auto Attendant Uniform Call Distribution NO ACTION MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller does not act This message has a default selection of ROM message number 59 but it can be replaced with a customised message 01 48 or with any other ROM message 49 64 CAMP ON Determines if calls will be transferred to busy stations Calls transferred to busy stations will be camped on The default value is OFF ANSWER DELAY Sets how many rings will occur before this plan answers a call The default value is 01 second RETRY COUNT Determines how many selection errors a caller may make before being transferred to the invalid digits destination In case of no action will not follow this option The default value is 3 TRANSLATION TABLE Determines what translation table this plan will use see MMC 732 Auto Attendant Trans Table The default value is same number of plan number BUSY DESTINATION Determines the destination for the call if the selected destination is busy This can be another station station group or plan Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two digits 01 12 The default value is 500 NO ANSWER DESTINATION Determines the destination for the call if the selected destination does not answer This can be another station station group or plan Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two digits 01 12 The default value is 500 NO ACTION DESTINATION Determines the destination for the ca
330. program DEFAULT DATA ITP 5012L sets are automatically set to USED RELATED ITEMS MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 209 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP This program allows you to set a call group in which each station or Trunk line is included It is useful if you want to limit a call between stations outgoing calls through a Trunk line or call pickup PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER To exit programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 614 STATION GROUP Display shows first station 201 001 2 Enter 0 if you want to set a call group to a station TRUNK GROUP Enter 1 if user want to set a call 701 301 group to a trunk OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter a number you want TRUNK GROUP OR 702 301 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 4 Enter the number of the call group you TRUNK GROUP want to set 702 302 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit the program OR Press Speaker button to move on to the next program Page 2 210 SAMSU
331. ptions KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 841 Display shows the first available option Enter option category number 0 8 via dial keypad Or press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter option number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter option data OR Press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY PHONE VERSION LARGE DGP 0000 ITP REGISTRATION TYPE SYS PSWD ITE REGISTRATION PSWD 1234 ITP REGISTRATION PSWD 8228 Page 2 395 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY This MMC is only used for system resource display This is displayed the used resources and the free resources This is a READ ONLY MMC 0 DTMFR DSP S 1 CIDDSP S 2 R2MFC DSP S 3 CONF GROUP S PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 850 DTMFR DSP S Display shows USE
332. r OR ALL TRK MOH Press ANS RLS button to select ALL MOH SOURCE 3 Enter source number e g 371 705 TRK MOH OR MOH SOURCE 371 Press Volume button to select option Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above Page 2 120 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA TONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 736 ASSIGN AA MOH MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 121 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 409 TRUNK STATUS READ Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk This is a read only MMC 00 01 02 03 04 05 Port Number Cabinet Slot Port Type LOOP GND E amp M DID BRI PRI VOIP 1A2 Emulation On Off Trunk Forward On Off Line Type CO PBX Dial DTFM Dial Pulse 06 11 Ring Plan Toll Restriction 1 6 12 17 Ring Plan Ring Destination 1 6 18 MOH Source 19 DISA Status PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 409 701 TRK STATUS Display shows PORT 1 95 01 2 Enter trunk number dial keypad e g 704
333. r controls the time before dial tone is MSEC sent to a single line station HOOK ON TIME 1000 20 2500 This timer sets the minimum amount of time that MSEC the system will recognize as an SLT hang up INQUIRY RELEASE 30 1 250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interaction of the Soft button to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status This timer affects only display phones INTER DIGIT TIME 10 1 250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning you back to error tone ISDN INT DGT TM 7 1 15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling string on an ISDN call SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 165 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 TIMER NAME DEFAULT POSE DESCRIPTION UNIT KMMC LOCK OUT TM 30 10 250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status LCR ADVANCE TIME 5 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance LCR INTER DIGIT 5 1 250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk LONG KEY DETECT 600 0 2500 MSEC This timer controls t
334. r will remain in the UCD queue until answered Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final destination The UCD will route calls to the final destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in DND Example If this counter is set to 02 callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD message be placed on hold hear the second UCD message be placed on hold and finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a UCD agent This destination is only reached if a the caller dials an exit digit during a message or b the retry count has expired The final destination can be a station number a group number a disconnect or another plan Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two digits 01 12 A disconnect is entered as a destination of NONE Hold button If the final destination is a voice mail port the port will receive a FWD from UCD group integration message The final destination will forward or overflow If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message If the final destination is not forwarded the call will ring or camp on to the final destination i
335. ress Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MC 502 STATION TIMERS MC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING M M M M SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 205 FORWARD 1 ALL CALL NONE 205 FORWARD 1 ALL CALL 201 205 FORWARD CURENTLY SET 5 Page 2 5 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 103 SET ANSWER MODE Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options 0 RING MODE The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns Calls are answered by pressing the ANS RLS Button or by lifting the handset 1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone the phone will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone When a Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer but the phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS RLS Button or lifted the handset 2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring After a short attention tone callers can make an announ
336. restriction call barring when a specific numbering plan is so desired There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 704 Display shows 2 Press Volume button to select X Y or Z e g Z and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to option line 3 Press Volume button to move cursor to option digit desired e g 5 and enter 1 put under other digits as required Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 1 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA X ENTRIES SET TO 1 OTHER ENTRIES SET TO 0 RELATED ITEMS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 1x IN N DISPLAY 0123456789 BAIN 0123456789 2000000000000 0123456789 000001000000 2 225 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers There are up to 500 entries available for programming see MMC 606 Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a s
337. ries Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY CIS ail 100 MMC ROUE MMC 1025 MMC 102 STN STN LOCK YES MOCK MES TENANT 1 CALL FWD YES TENANT 1 CALL FWD NO Page 2 333 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 803 ASSIGN TENANT GROUP OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Allows the assignment of tenant groups on a per cabinet slot and port basis The simple rule is Cabinet Slot Port Tenant The simplicity of this program allows for flexible assignments The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 803 Display shows 2 Enter cabinet number if no change press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter slot number if no change press RIGHT Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter port number if no change press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Enter tenant number if no change press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL ASSIGNMENTS TENANT 1 RELATED ITEMS TENANT GROUP Pa
338. ronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide 2003 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd rights reserved Information in this document is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd No information contained here may be copied translated transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Information in this document is subject to change without notice ELECTRONICS
339. ronics Co Ltd Page VII Table of Contents OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 100 STATION LOCK qu 2 2 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE ccc ccc 2 3 102 CALL FORWARD M 2 4 103 SET ANSWER 2 6 104 STATON Pi e 2 8 105 STATION SPEED DIAL eese tha nne tna einst ans asi 2 10 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME eese enne 2 12 107 KEY EXTENDER Sec 2 14 108 STATION 2 16 109 DATE DISPLAY EEA 2 18 110 STATION ON OFF 2 20 111 PHONE RING TONE 2 22 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOQCK 2 23 113 VIEW MEMO 2 25 114 PHONE VOLUME UN 2 27 115 SET PROGRAMMED 2 29 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE 2 30 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE 2 32 118 CONFERENCE GROUP 4 4 4 4 2 34 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY 04 1 101111 2 36 120
340. rooms CHECK OUT TIME If a room is occupied during the checkout time an additional days room charge will be automatically added to the room bill If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional days room charge will not be added Setting a room status to hold is how a late check out can be performed ROOM CLEAN TIME This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied rooms as NEEDS CLEANING CHECK IN END TM This time is used to decide an additional days room charge will be automatically added to the room bill when the first check out time is reached after check in a This MMC is available for Hotel Motel enabled only PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 513 CHECK OUT TIME Display shows HH MM 2 Select the timer using the Volume buttons ROOM CLEAN TIME 3 Enter new time using above 24 hour clock ROOM CLEAN TIME system returns to step 2 HH MM 11 30 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 185 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 514 TONE SOURCE This progra
341. ror has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data Error Task MJB DSP Error System DSP Fault 15 MJCO01 DTMF Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system DTMF resources Alarm data DTMF Receiver DSP position 16 MJCO2 Tone Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system tone resources Alarm data TONE Receiver DSP position 24 MJC10 AA DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card DTMF resources Alarm data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 25 MJC11 AA MFR Rec An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card DTMF resources has recovered Alarm data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 26 MJC12 E911 Restart The E911 card has restarted Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 27 MJC13 E911 Block The E911 card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 30 MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI card has restarted Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 31 MJC17 WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system Page 2 400 detects the card does not work correctly Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming CODE ALARM NAME DEFINITION MJD DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault 32 MJD01 Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous 33 MJD02 Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous 34 MJD03 Red Alarm Lo
342. rt priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone This value can be left at default value 00000 if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management This data uses case of MMC 841 DSP PARA DOWN PHONE DATA only Default is all bits 0 13 S W VERSION Display IP phone software version This read only data 14 SAN UPGRADE This is used IP phone software upgrade request command When this selects YES and press Right Soft button the system requests to IP phone software upgrade with TFTP IP address PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press TRSF 840 3201 USER ID Display shows 3201 2 Enter IP phone number via dial keypad 3210 USER ID OR 3210 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad 3210 DSP TYPE OR 729 Press Volume to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter option data via dial keypad 3210 DSP TYPE OR Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 391 CHAPTER 2 MMC Program
343. rtual extension port types are followed 00 SLT Emulates SLI port 01 24 BTN SET 24 buttons phone 02 12 BTN SET 12 buttons phone 03 7 BTN SET 7 buttons phone 04 6 BTN SET 6 buttons phone 05 28 BTN SET 28 buttons phone 06 18 BTN SET 18 buttons phone 07 8 BTN SET 8 buttons phone 08 38 BTN SET 38 buttons phone 09 21 BTN SET 21 buttons phone 10 14 SET 14 buttons phone 11 LARGE SET Large LCD phone 12 NONE not used PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select all ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 822 3501 PORT Display shows SLT 2 Enter virtual extension number 3502 PORT TYPE OR SLT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL PORT TYPE Press ANS RLS button to select all SLT Page 2 360 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 3 Enter virtual extension type 3501 PORT TYPE OR 21 BIN SET Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA 3501 3546 SLT 3401 3480 21 BTN SET RELATED ITEMS MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN SAMSUNG Electronics Co
344. runk is set to this option calls will ring at the destination defined in MMC 406 for that trunk If the destination defined in MMC 406 is VMAA port or group then the system will repeat the digits received from the CO to the port when it answers PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 416 701 EM DD RING Display shows FOLLOW INCOM DGT 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 EM DD RING OR FOLLOW INCOM DGT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL EM DD RING Press ANS RLS button to select all trunks FOLLOW INCOM DGT Page 2 134 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 3 Dial option number 0 2 705 EM DD RING OR NO RCV DIGIT 00 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return step2 If the FOLLOW TRK RING is selected the LCD display shows step 4 4 Enter the number of incoming digits 705 EM DD RING NO RCV DIGIT 00 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA FOLLOW INCOMING DIGIT RELATED ITEMS MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 135 CHAPTER
345. s or F Used to enter name for speed dial bin see MMC 106 ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 105 201 SPEED DIAL Display shows 00 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 SPEED DIAL OR 00 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor If selected station has no speed dial bins the 205 SPEED DIAL display will be as shown and a new station may SPDBLK NOT EXIST be selected 3 Dial location number e g 05 205 SPEED DIAL OR 053 _ Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor Page 2 10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 Enter trunk access code e g 9 followed by the 205 SPEED DIAL number to be dialled e g 4264100 05 9 4264100 OR Press the Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press the Left Soft button to return to step 3 Press HOLD button to clear an entry If an error 15 made use DOWN arrow to step back 5 Press F button to access MMC 106 Station Speed Dial Name OR Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 11 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 106 STATION SPEED D
346. s SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 402 701 DIAL TYPE Display shows DTMF TYPE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 DIAL TYPE OR DTMF TYPE Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR ALL DIAL TYPE Press ANS RLS button to select ALL 3 Dial 0 for DTMF 1 for PULSE or 2 for 704 DIAL TYPE R2MFC TYPE DIAL PULSE TYPE OR Use Volume button to scroll through options Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS DTMF RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS Page 2 110 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS Assigns toll class level assignments on CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming a per trunk or all trunk basis in a day or night condition The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702 Toll Deny Table and 703 Toll Allowance Table The toll classes that are available are listed below with their entry numbers 0 F STN Follow station toll restriction 1 CLS A Follow toll class A Unrestricted 2 CLS B Follow toll class B 3 CLS C Follow toll class C
347. s a DAILY alarm as described below The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time Alarm numbers are 1 2 and 3 In the case of Secondary Pair assignments MMC 220 the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station 0 NOTSET No alarm 1 TODAY Alarm only once 2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 112 201 ALM CLK 1 Display shows HHMM gt NOTSET 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 ALM CLK 1 HHMM 2NOTSET Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 3 Dial 1 3 to select alarm e g 1 205 ALM CLK 1 OR gt NOTSET Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button 4 Enter alarm time in 24 hour clock format 205 ALM CLK 2 e g 1300 for 1pm HHMM 13002 NOTSET SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 23 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Dial entry from above list for alarm type e g 2 12051 ALM CLK 2 OR HHMM 1300 DAILY Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR
348. s disconnected by force when called party does not answer DISA PASS CHECK 30 1 250 MIN This timer defines the time period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter DISPLAY DELAY TM 3 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration a display is shown in the LCD display This timer also controls the duration of time that error tone is heard DOOR LOCK RELES 500 100 2500 This timer controls the duration of time the MSEC door lock relay will be activated DOOR RING DETECT 50 10 250 This timer controls the duration of time before MSEC call is answered by the door phone DOOR RING OFF TM 30 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling E HOLD RECALL TM 45 0 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling FIRST DIGIT TIME 10 1 250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the you to error tone HOK FLASH MAX TM 150 20 2500 This timer monitors the duration of a hook MSEC switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration HOK FLASH MIN TM 70 20 2500 This timer monitors the duration of a MSEC hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration HOOK OFF TIME 100 20 2500 This time
349. s is the E 164 identifier used by the H 323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper This can be up to 16 digits in length 07 GKKEEPALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge the presence of the gatekeeper The range is 000 999 seconds Default is 0 SEC 08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route in case the primary gatekeeper is down Selections are PSTN or ALTER GK Default is PSTN 09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL depending on your gatekeeper s capabilities Default is AUTO 11 URQ REASON Select ON or OFF for usage of Un register Request RAS URQ MODE messages Default is ON 12 RRQ FAIL TIME Programs the time frame to re send Registration Request RAS RRQ messages to a gatekeeper Default is 30 seconds The range is 1 99 13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for usage of Gatekeeper RAS Request GRQ messages Default is OFF PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Used to advance next MMC Page 2 385 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 836 GK CONNECTION Display shows the first available option DISABLE 2 Enter 323 option via dial keypad GK ROUTING OR DISABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter H 323 GK op
350. s only one of the four options to be selected the assignment of account code with verification account code without verification authorization codes or none on a per station basis or on an all station basis The system supports 500 authorization codes The system supports 999 account codes that are verified when account codes verified is selected If account codes without verification is selected then there will be no table used 0 NONE No Account or Authorization code required NOT forced strictly voluntary 1 AUTHORIZE CODE Forces user to enter a valid over four digit Authorization code listed in AUTHORIZATION CODE Table MMC 707 2 ACCT VERIFIED Forces user to enter a valid account code listed in ACCOUNT CODE Table MMC 708 3 ACCT NO VERIFIED PROGRAM BUTTONS Forces user to enter an account code but this code is NOT verified User can make up any code any account code up to 12 digits including and VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 305 201 FORCD CODE Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 FORCD CODE OR DISPLAY NONE NONE Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Diala feature option 0
351. sed to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 67 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 ACTION l DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 217 TRAFFIC REPORT Display shows MANUAL PRINTOUT Dial 0 for demand or 1 for automatic print TRAFFIC REPORT OR AUTO PRINT OPTN Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT Soft button Dial 0 1 2 or 3 for automatic print option TRAFFIC REPORT OR DAILY HHMM 2359_ Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button Enter daily report time HHMM TRAFFIC REPORT DAILY 2200 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO REPORT RELATED ITEMS MMC 804 SYSTEM 1 0 Page 2 68 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE Assign the ISDN service type of single line telephone port Service consist of BC Bearer Capability and HLC High Layer Capability TYPE DESCRIPTION BC HLC 0 VOICE Voice service Speech 1 FAX3 G3 FAX service 3 1kHzAudio FAX G2 G3 2 AUDIO 3 1 3 1 kHz Audio service 3 1 kHz Audio None 3 MODEM MODEM service 3 1 kHz Audio Telephony PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through optio
352. select and press RGHT Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 STATION FORWARDING MMC 301 STATION COS MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 299 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 741 DBS RESTART Provides a method of restarting DBS and BSI card PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 741 Display shows 2 Select the BSI slot via dial button pad OR Press Volume button to select BSI slot and press Right Soft button 3 Select the DBS number via dial button pad OR Press Volume button to select DBS number and Right Soft button If you want to restart BSI card press ANS RLS button and press Right Soft button 4 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 5 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 300 BSI S RESTA BSI S RESTA BSI SLOT OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 DISPLAY LOT LOT RT RESTART BESE ON RESTA BSI 5
353. sets enable when system receives ISDN call connection message system checks valid data of encapsulated time and date and update system time and date device 1 SYSTEM SPPED BIN Sets max 500 0 or max 950 1 the maximum number of system speed dial bin If sets 500 then same in previous system If sets 950 can assign system speed dial block is up to 950 bins and speed dial bin numbers always 3 digits 000 to 999 Even if station speed dial bin numbers are 3 digits 000 to 049 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through system alarms KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Enter leave option SPEAKER Used to store data and move to next MMC TRANSFER Enter exit MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 861 AUTO UPDATE TIME Display shows DISABLE 2 Enterthe option number AUTO UPDATE TIME OR DISABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter 1 or 0 for option data select AUTO UPDATE TIME OR ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 416 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA AUTO UPDATE TIME DISABLE SYSTEM SPEED BIN MAX 500 RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 ASSIGN TIME AND DATE MMC 606 ASSING SPEED DIAL BL
354. shows 209 IN OUT 2 Dial VM number VM IN OUT OR 215 IN OUT Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter In or Out via dial keypad VM IN OUT OR 215 8 IN Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA IN OUT RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 321 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 758 VM DAY NIGHT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail Card Built In Voice Mail Card can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode This mode will determine what main menu greetings and options are played to the callers This operating mode can change automatically if enabled in Built In Voice Mail Card according to the setting in this MMC This MMC containes either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan PROGRAM KEY VOLUME Selects YES or NO KEYPAD Selects YES or NO SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 758 VM DAY NIGHT Display shows RING 1 DAY 2 Enter ring plan number VM DAY NIGHT OR RING 3 DAY Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 for day or 1 for night VM DAY NIGHT OR RING 3 DAY Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button t
355. shows RX 0 0 TX 0 0 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRK GAIN via the dial pad RX 0 0 TX 0 0 OR Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Press Volume button to make selection 705 TRK GAIN Press Right Soft button to move cursor RX 0 0 TX 0 0 4 Press Volume button to make selection 701 TRK GAIN Press Right Soft button to move cursor and RX 0 0 TX 2 5 return to Step 1 5 Press ANS RLS button to select ALL ALL TRK GAIN ox eas 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA TX 0 0 RX 0 0 RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 152 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to each other within the same system PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 428 Display shows Dial the trunk use group number e g 305 OR Press Volume button to selection and press Right Soft button OR Press ANS RLS button to select all trunk use groups Dial the trunk use group number e g 304 OR Press Volume button to sel
356. shows current assignment NONE NO UA 2 Dial DN of UA device e g 205 ASSIGN UA PORT OR 205 STATION Use Volume buttons to scroll through available devices 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE Page 2 50 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated If interrupted is chosen the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 204 3801 COM BELL Display shows current setting CONTINUOUS 2 Dial common bell number 3801 COM BELL OR CONTINUOUS Press Volume button to make selection of common bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted 3802 COM BELL operation INTERRUPTED OR Use Volume button to scroll through options and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to ad
357. sovimax 22 oa 0 Pi ey 47 eioiatetiore 1 FER Enterprise IP Solutions OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide COPYRIGHT This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd and is protected by copyright No information contained herein may be copied translated transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to third parties in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd TRADEMARKS OfficeServ 500 is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies Please read this guide before using the OfficeServ 500 system and follow the instructions to use the OfficeServ 500 system safely and correctly This manual may be changed for the product improvement standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice For further information on the updated manual or have a question the content of manual contact your Authorised Samsung Reseller INTRODUCTION Purpose This guide is a programming description for OfficeServ 500 system users OfficeServ 500 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup Likewise using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC Man Machine Communication program This guide describes how to use a digital phone to use MMC When there are questions about Off
358. ss Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Enter option number to make selection 730 PRI OPTION OR PRI MODE DDI Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Volume button to make selection 730 PRI OPTION Then press Right Soft button cuc MOD E NORMAL 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA CHANNELANY YES PRI MODE DDI DLSEND OVERLAP CLIP TABLE NONE NB TYPE NATIONAL NB PLAN ISDN RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER MMC 418 CARD RESTART MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 143 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 421 MSN DIGIT Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station If any entry in MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call s called party number either the specific station is alerted if it is programmed to accept the call or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is released by option You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select call waiting option when a destination is busy the incoming call must be cleared or camped on to the station which is alerted to the call There is a total of eig
359. ssary TIMER TABLE RANGE TIMER NAME DEFAULT DESCRIPTION UNIT DGT TIME 5 1 25 SEC When the AA card is installed this timer determines the inter digit time for AA call processing If this timer expires before valid digits are received by the AA card the call will be routed to the AA invalid digits destination AA NO ACT TIME 10 1 25 SEC When the AA card is installed this timer determines the time that the AA card will wait for a first digit for AA call processing If this timer expires before a digit is received the call will be routed to the AA no action destination AA TRANS TIME 2 0 25 SEC After this timer the system will compare received digits from AA card with the AA translation table entry and transfer to the proper destination ALARM TIME 100 0 2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start ringing after the alarm key has been silenced ALERT TONE TIME 1000 100 2500 This timer sets the duration of the attention MSEC tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice Announce or Auto Answer mode This tone will also precede a forced Auto Answer call ALM REM INTERVAL 25 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time length between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is set ALM REM RING OFF 10 1 25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle duration when alarm reminder is set at a station ATT RECALL TIME 30 0 250 SEC This is the length of time a transfer recall
360. station cards and tone tests If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic the system will abort the test and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time It is recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non peak traffic periods PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME Display shows SUN 2 Enter weekday number DIAGNOSTIC TIME 0 Sun 1 Mon 6 Sat SUN OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter military time hour via the dial pad DIAGNOSTIC TIME Cursor will advance to next entry SUN 23 _ 4 Enter military time minutes via the dial pad DIAGNOSTIC TIME Data saved and cursor will advance to Step 2 SUN 23 30 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET RELATED ITEMS MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY Page 2 408 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS This MMC provides a means to review the common use hardware that is mounted in the system System Options show miscellaneous hardware and daughter boards This enables the technician t
361. stop voice mail integration VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports Voice mail card ports are assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects a CADENCE or a SVMi 8 16 card PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 207 209 VMAA PORT NORMAL PORT Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 VMAA PORT OR NORMAL PORT Page 2 54 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 or O to select port type 205 VMAA PORT 1 0 NORMAL VMAA PORT Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA NORMAL PORT RELATED ITEMS MMC 726 VM AA OPTIONS MMC 601 STATION GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 55 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE Provides the flexibility to program sing
362. system resources SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 189 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 AA This is used to group a number of AA ports An Auto Attendant AA card must be installed in the system to do this 4 BI VMS This is the voice mail group for the Built In Voice Mail Card When a Built In Voice Mail Card is installed group 529 must be programmed as a BI VMS group on a M system and group 549 must be used for a system Group 529 549 are fixed for BI VMS use If BI VMS is not installed in the system group 529 or 549 can be used as any other group can be used 5 MESSAGE Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a message desk or message group When one of the stations in this type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged station will return the message to the message group so any member can answer the call If a station is a member of more than one message group then any message indications made by that station would be for the first numerical message group they are a member of It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station groups RING MODE Each group can have one of the following ring modes This will decide how calls are placed to the group 0 SEQUENTIAL The stations listed as members see below will be called on a first available basis Calls will first go to the first member if the first member is busy calls will go to
363. t Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA RCV YES SND YES RELATED ITEMS MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS Page 2 92 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL Allows the outgoing call restricted by call duration time disconnect or confirm with tone 0 NONE No action 1 CONFIRM TONE When a Trunk Line confirm tone time expire a call user heard system confirmation tone and next a Trunk Line confirm tone time started 2 DISCONNECT When a Trunk Line confirm tone time expire a call is disconnected PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 314 201 CO CONFIRM Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CO CONFIRM OR NONE Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL CO CONFIRM Press ANS RLS button to select all stations NONE 3 Dial a feature option 0 2 205 CO CONFIRM OR CONFIRM TONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer bu
364. t TOS bit prioritization to identify the transport priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone This value can be left at default value 00000 if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management This data uses case only on this MMC Default is all bits O 3 DOWN Determines data uses system wide data or each phone data for IP based phone DSP control Default is SYS DATA 0 SYSDATA System wide data will be used MMC 841 data 1 PHONE DATA Each phone data will be used MMC 840 data 6 ITP TX GAIN Sets IP based phone TX gain value Defaults are followed but depend on Country 7 ITP RX GAIN Sets IP based phone RX gain value Defaults are followed but depend on Country 8 VERS UPGRADE Sets IP based phone software upgrade option with the system 0 TYPE Sets IP based phone software upgrade type Default is MMC COMMAND 0 MMC COMMAND IP based phone software upgrades manually in MMC 840 1 PHONE CON IP based phone software upgrades automatically at phone connection 2 AUTO TIME IP based phone software upgrades automatically at set time 1 START TIME IP based phone software automatically upgrade start time Default is 0000 Disable 2 INTERVAL IP based phone software automatically upgrade interval time Default is 10 seconds Page 2 394 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through o
365. t call begins ringing The range is 000 250 The default is 010 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 203 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 09 AUTO LOG OUT This YES NO option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000 10 ALLOUT FINAL This YES NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will disconnect 11 AGENT PIN NO This YES NO option determines if an agent is required to enter an Agent ID when logging on to this group The Agent ID can be entered in MMC 717 12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES NO option determines if all agents are busy specifies whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER Used to exit programming ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 607 530 UCD OPTION Display shows FIRST MSG 61 2 Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial 1542 UCD OPTION group number TIRSGIL MSC 761 OR Press Left Soft button to position cursor under 530 UCD OPTION message number and enter
366. t group number 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to enter more stations OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 79 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones One BOSS station can have up to and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and including four BOSS stations A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone s A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME U KEYPAD U sed to scroll through options sed to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS SECRETARY field ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 303 BOSS STN NONE Display shows SECR 1 NONE 2 Dial BOSS station number e g 205 BOSS STN 205 OR SECR 1 NONE Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 3 Dial SECRETARY number 1 2 3 or 4 BOSS STN 205 OR SECR 1 NONE Press Volume button to
367. t mode user can not use one touch account code ACC key 39 SGR ALL OUT OFF When ON the last of station group member can out of group 40 CHAIN FWD ON When ON a call is directed to a station that may be forwarded to another station that is call forwarded to a VMAA then the caller will be directed to the last station s mailbox it reached When OFF the caller will be directed to the first station s mailbox instead of the last 41 TRK MONITER OFF When ON can override to trunk and a call is connected override extension when a original caller hang on When OFF can override to extension only and a call is disconnected when a original caller hang on 42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF When ON a MFR assigned for VoIP tandem call when a Call incoming from VoIP trunk to another trunk outgoing 43 NTWK AUTOTMR OFF When OFF a call duration timer disabled via networking intercom call 44 USE EURO OFF When ON a call cost display by euro currency 45 NO STAFF COD OFF When ON the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in HOTEL operation 46 PERI UCD SIO OFF When ON the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port 47 AUTO CLEANED OFF When the room is checked out the room status is changed to NEED CLEAN When the option is set to ON the room status will be changed to AVAILABLE 48 REDIAL REVW OFF When ON the CALL L
368. t of page announcements if phone becomes free during a page 06 RING PREF ON When OFF requires you to press the fast flashing button to answer ringing call after lifting the handset 07 CALL COST OFF When ON the cost of the call in progress will show in the upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration of the call 08 AUTO CAMPON OFF When ON phone users can allow intercom calls to camp on to other phones without having to press a CAMP ON key 09 AME BGM OFF This feature selects whether a station using Answer Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting A BGM source must be selected for this to work 10 AME PASSCODE OFF When ON station users who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left 11 DISP SPDNAME OFF When ON the speed dial name associated with a speed dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD display when using speed dial 12 CID REVW ALL ON When ON saves information on all calls that ring at an extension When OFF saves information only on calls that were not answered at the extension or by voice mail Page 2 20 13 SECURE OHVA ON When ON OHVA announcements will be heard on the handset When OFF OHVA announcements will be heard over the phone speaker SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd
369. t to be assigned The system has 2000 total bins Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRANSFER To exit programming ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 608 201 REVIEW BLK Display shows first station 10 0060 FREE 2 Enter desired EXT number e g 205 205 REVW BLOCK OR 10 0060 FREE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter valid number for bins e g 5 205 REVW BLOCK OR 50 0010 FREE Press Volume button to make selection OR Press Hold button to delete bin s 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA PHONES 10 BINS RELATED ITEMS CALL LOG FEATURE INCOMING CALL Page 2 206 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 609 CALL LOG BLOCK CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Provides means of adding or deleting Call LOG blocks to an individual phone With the ability to delete a block or blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays The free list will show how many bins are left that be assigned The system has 2000 total bins Each phone may be assigned a maximum of
370. t to voice mail ports These in band codes can be 0 9 A B or C and performed two functions CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION This is a DTMF signaling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port answers a call This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it 15 receiving and where the call is coming from e g call has forwarded from extension 225 CALL PROGRESS TONES These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of the call e g ring back busy or disconnect Most Voice Mail systems can utilize DTMF in band signaling for more efficient call processing This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to the type of automated attendant and or voice mail system connected CALL and TYPE INFORMATION The format of the DTMF data sent to VM AA port is as follows CALL TYPE DNI SEPARATOR DN2 an example of this would be FORWARD ALL from 225 on trunk 703 Each field can be programmed individually as follows EXTENSION FOR DNI If set to yes when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DNI field indicating that a station is ringing the VMAA port If setto no when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send station data in the DNI field Default No TRUNK FOR DNI If set to yes when the voice mail auto attendant system answers call the system will
371. talled you may also select a SVMi recording as a music The recording must already been defined in MMC 756 and will show up here as the SVMi port assigned with the recording PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 308 201 BGM SOURCE Display shows current setting BGM SOURCE NONE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 BGM SOURCE OR BGM SOURCE NONE Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR ALL BGM SOURCE Press ANS RLS button to select all stations BGM SOURCE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 87 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 3 Enter source number e g 371 205 BGM SOURCE OR BGM SOURCE 371 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS Page 2 88 MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC 736 ASSIGN AA MOH MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
372. tation If 0 is shown below a carrier then this carrier cannot be used by the base station 2 Dial 1 or 0 for each carrier 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA 1111111111 RELATED ITEMS MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC 741 DBS RESTART MMC 742 BSI STATUS MMC 743 DBS STATUS MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 305 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow Data entry for this program is in three fields ENTRY DIGITS and COST RATE table reference DIGITS Up to 500 entries may be made Each entry can be up to ten digits These are the entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that match the number dialled For example if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL PLAN contains 1 1308 and 1312 the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and 1312 do not form a complete match When this table is created by the technician or when any new entries are added the system automatically places all entries in numerical order Wild cards can be used to repr
373. tem KMMC LOCK OUT TM returns to step 2 with new value 060 SEC gt 250 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME TIMERS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 168 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per station basis or for all stations Answer takes place 1250 sec NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No the SLT port 1009900 ms DTMF DUR This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to an external VMS system port This can be used when a VMS system fails to recognize the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from FDGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay before generating DTMF digits for In Band integration 1009900 ms OFFHK SEL This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal external call as programmed in MMC 306 0250 sec 1250 sec PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 502 Display shows Dial station number e g
374. the call to the destination to continue routing at the far end destination 3 INSERT DGT This is the digit s to insert for routing at the destination This can be used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is needed to be inserted in the dialled digits 4 IP TABLE 1 This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP address The system has 64 IP tables 00 63 with 16 entries 00 15 in each table See MMC 833 5 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to associate with the access code This can be used to manage where to start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications Example If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in the last 7 entries of a table the IP START location would be 8 IP address searching would start at entry 8 6 GKUSE This parameter determines whether a H 323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to establish this connection PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC Page 2 376 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 832 0 00 ACCESS DGT Display shows the outbound and first access 0 code 2 Enter 0 for O outbound or 1 for I inbound 0 00 ACCESS DG
375. the display will show INVALID DATA If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU the display will show MADE BUSY If the station is in busy state with no other connection the display will show BUSY only PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC TRANSFER Exit ACTION DISPLAY Display trunk connection status 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 Enter station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show connection status 702 227 3 Enter another station or trunk OR DISPLAY STATUS Press transfer to exit 702 227 Display station connection status 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 Enter station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show connection status 235 719 3 Enter another station or trunk OR DISPLAY STATUS Press transfer to exit 235 718 2 156 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Display trunk status in conference l Press Transfer button and enter 434 Enter station or trunk number Display shows connection status Press Right Soft button to display the next station or trunks involved Enter another station or trunk OR Press transfer to exit Display status no connection Press Transfer button and enter 434 Enter station or trunk number Display show connecti
376. the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right RELEASE Used to advance next MMC HOLD Clears previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 209 301 AOM MASTER Display shows first AOM MASTER NONE 2 Dial AOM number 301 AOM MASTER OR MASTER NONE Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers and use Soft buttons to move cursor 3 Enter station number e g 301 301 AOM MASTER OR MASTER 201 Use VOLUME for selection of stations and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE FOR MASTER RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Page 2 57 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT Allows the system administrator to set in system features on a per tenant basis Each system option has a corresponding dialling number as listed below options toggle ON OFF 00 OPTIONS DISA PSWD DEFAULT ON DESCRIPTION When ON a caller must enter extension number and DISA password when they call a DISA trunk When OFF extension number and DISA password are not required and the caller has full access to all features allowed on t
377. til under toll class mark e g E 212 000100 Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 221 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0 RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER Page 2 222 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible There are 250 allowable entries in the allow table for a OfficeServ 500 M system and 500 allowable entries for a OfficeServ 500 L system and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service Each index can have up to 12 digits With the use of wild cards MMC 704 Assign Wild Character more flexibility can be built into toll restriction There are six toll levels B to G that are programmable Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default and toll level H is set as in house only by default PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear
378. tion data GK ROUTING OR ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS Page 2 386 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 837 SIP OPTIONS This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol SIP trunking parameters The MCP2 supports SIP and H 323 on a per call per port basis The settings are system wide When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 00 GATEWAY CALL ID This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies this system Default is 1234 01 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification type There are 3 possible selections 0 GWID Which shows the gateway call ID 1 ANI Which shows the calling station number Default 2 I P Which shows the calling H 323 gateway IP address 02 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct in line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call Default is 500 03 UDP PORT TRUNK Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call Default is 5060 04 UDP PORT PHONE Sets the
379. tion is made press Right Soft button to move cursor When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected Select the desired volume level via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to go to the next volume level and press Right Soft button b Enter desired volume data via dial pad OR When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected Enter desired MISC BGM tsw gain via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to select desired MISC BGM tsw gain and press Right Soft button When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected Select the TX tsw connect type via dial button pad OR Press Volume button to go to the next TX tsw connect type and press Right Soft button SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 030 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 11 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 1 1 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 123 MISC TSW GAIN BGM MOH 0 TSW GAIN CONTROL SLTODGP 0 0 Page 2 339 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 b Select the RX tsw connect type via dial button pad TSW GAIN CONTROL OR SLT ATRK 40 0 Press Volume button to go to the next RX tsw connect type and press Right Soft button c Enter desired tsw gain control data via dial pad TSW GAIN CONTROL OR SLTDATRK 1 9 Press Volume button to scroll data and press Right Soft button 7 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRI
380. tion selection Max Digit is 12 5 Enter destinations for 6 ring plan via dial keypad e g 204 for ring plan 1 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 6 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 7 Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 8 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT MMC 423 S T MODE MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DISPLAY 701 MSN DGT Dos 1 704 DGT MSN DGT 1 704 MSN DGT DGT 4 704 MSN DGT DGT 4603881 4 704 MSN DGT 1 204 2 NONE 4 704 MSN DGT 4 CWENO OPT S ACH 2m 704 MSN DGT 4 CW NO OPT ACEPT Page 2 145 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 422 TRUNK COS Used to assign a class of service to each trunk during one of the 6 different ring plans available There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701 Assign COS Contents Classes of service are numbered 01 30 Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ANS RLS Used to
381. tone 12 Page 2 58 CONF TONE OFF When ON provides conference tone every conference tone time Available in Australia or Italy only SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 13 OPTIONS RECALL PIKUP DEFAULT ON CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DESCRIPTION When ON a call recalling to a station can be picked up using Direct Call Pickup Pickup Group and My Group features This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station 14 ICM EXT FWD OFF When ON call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External programmed and set 16 DID ERR TONE OFF This option was added to provide error tone when an invalid DID number is received 18 KTS DISC ALM OFF When ON generates system alarm when a phone disconnect or connect 19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF When ON generates system alarm when a phone maintains off hook condition longer than timer 20 SL SELF RING OFF When ON generates ring during 10 seconds when a single line phone dials self number and hang up 21 SGR INC BUSY OFF When ON generates busy tone when all station group member busy for group call 24 TRANSFER CANCEL OFF When OFF a single line phone will be able to handle 2
382. ts the type of barge in that is permitted 0 NO BARGE IN Barge in feature is unavailable regardless of a station s barge in status 1 BARGE IN WITH TONE Barge in will have an intrusion tone and display at the barged in on station 2 BARGE IN WITHOUT TONE is allowed There is no barge in tone or display at the barged in on station and the barging in station will be muted PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 206 BARGE IN TYPE Display shows NO BARGE IN 2 DialO 2 to select barge in type e g 2 BARGE IN TYPE OR WITHOUT TONE Press Volume button to select barge in type and press Right Soft button 3 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NO BARGE IN RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 53 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA VMAA ports receive digits designated in MMC 726 VM AA Options and also receive a true disconnect signal upon completion of a call Only SLI cards not key daughter boards support disconnect signal Do not make VMAA ports data this will return them to a single line port and
383. tton and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS MMC 734 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH Page 2 294 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE Used to identify your DECT system and the handsets your register with your system The DECT system Code for your system is actually made up of two fields the System ID which is three hexadecimal digits in the range 000 to 999 and the Auth Code short for Authentication Code which is four hexadecimal digits in the range 0000 to 9999 The default values are 000 and FFFF respectively You must use this MMC to change the default values for the values you have been provided with by your supplier If you do not change the defaults you will not be able to register handsets Once you have entered your new System ID and Auth Code using this MMC you can then begin registering your handsets with the Auth Code The system checks the Auth Code entered for each handset against the DECT Auth Code If it is the same the registration procedure continues otherwise the system rejects the registration procedure Only the system administrator and or installer should be allowed access to change the DECT System Code and register handsets CAUTIO
384. tton and enter to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 93 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION Customer Set Relocation allows System Administration level or Technician level access to relocate or exchange similar stations in the system without wiring changes see Allow Table bellow This program is a one for one exchange with like stations e g Single to single line 6 button phone to 6 button phone etc individual station assignments such as trunk ring station group station COS station speed dial button appearances etc will follow the Customer Set Relocation program 12 button phones and 24 button phones can be exchanged 48 button modules and 64 button modules can also be exchanged Single line stations numbers can be exchanged If incompatible set types are selected the system will provide an ERROR NO MATCH message If 48 or 64 button module units are to be exchanged the Master assignment must be removed prior to using Customer Set relocation If the 48 or 64 button module Master station is not removed the error code ERROR NOT ALONE will appear on the LCD display A station must be in the idle state on hook to perform Customer Set Relocation If a wired location has a station port connected but no telephone instrument the Custom
385. tton to make selection and press Right Soft button to make change and to move cursor Dial 3 4 or 5 e g 4 part conference bridge OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 0 to 4 e g 2 analog trunk member OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor DISPLAY CONFE RENCE GAIN USE DEFAULT YES CONFE RENCE GAIN USE DEFAULT NO RSA 0 CNET 6 0 SW 0 0 CONES 5 SAMSUNG Electronics OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 5 Press Volume button to select CNF gain and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Press Volume button to select SW gain and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor 7 Press TRSF to exit OR Press SPK to next MMC DEFAULT DATA USE DEFAULT YES CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming MEMBER 4 A TRK 2 MEMBER 4 A TRK 2 CNT SEO 225 6 0 Sms A TRK 0 1 2 3 4 3 CNF 2 5 2 5 2 5 SW 0 0 0 0 2 5 4 CNF 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 Sw 0 0 0 0 2 5 6 0 5 CNF 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 Sw 0 0 0 0 2 5 6 0 6 0 RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 355 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD C
386. tton to select a AA plan number and press Right Soft button to save and return step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA ALL PORTS AND GROUPS PLAN 01 RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 733 AUTO ATTENDANT PLAN PROGRAMMING SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 293 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 736 ASSIGN AA MOH Used to define what message 01 48 plays as a Music on Hold MOH source if selected in MMC 309 or 408 This message will repeat continuously Only the last AA port on an AA card can be used as a MOH source This MMC assigns a message number to the last port of each card This MMC must be programmed before data can be assigned in MMCs 309 408 and 607 PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 736 3958 SET Display shows MOH MSG NOT USE 2 Enter AA port number 3958 SET AAMOH OR MOH MSG NOT USE Press Volume button to select a AA port and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter AA MOH message number 3958 SET AAMOH MOH MSG 33 Press Volume button to select a AA MOH number and press Right Soft button to save and return step 2 4 Press Transfer bu
387. turn to Step 2 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 159 2 MC Programming DEFAULT DATA 0 0 RX 0 0 RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 160 OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS Used to set the values of the system counters The counters are listed below with a brief description of each COUNTER DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 ALARM REM CNTER 5 The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station before cancelling RANGE 1 99 1 AUTO RDL COUNTER 3 The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been activated RANGE 1 99 2 DISACALL CNTER 99 Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line RANGE 1 99 3 DISALOCK CNTER 3 Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the DISA line RANGE 99 4 NEW CALL COUNTER 99 Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call RANGE 1 99 5 UCDS VISUAL ALARM 0 Used to set the Visual alarm threshold It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 6 UCDS AUD
388. turn to step 3 5 Ifrequired enter extender e g 03 TYPE 12 BTN SETS OR 03 GPIKGPIKO3 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA RELATED ITEMS 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGTRAMMING Page 2 260 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations trunks station groups trunk groups and feature access codes The system can be pre programmed with a default three or four digit numbering for station station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP2 card There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code 00 STN DIAL NO This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 201 2xx 3xx last 319 or 2001 2xxx 01 TRK DIAL NO This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 701 7xx or 7001 7xxx 02 AAND DIAL NO This is where AA port or Voice Dial port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default AA ports 3951 39xx VD ports 3981 398x 03 MISC DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for relays MO
389. u use the last port as ports PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to delete an entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 756 SET VMMOH Display shows 209 NOT USE 2 Dial VM number SET VMMOH OR 215 NOT USE Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter VM message number SET VMMOH OR 215 s 28 Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 319 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 4 Press Transfer button and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NOT USE RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 320 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 757 VM IN OUT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card This MMC is used to assign each Voice Mail Port as used for incoming outgoing or both way calls Note that this MMC must support outgoing calls if off premises notification beeper outbound follow me of outbound notification is used PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 757 IN OUT Display
390. umber will hear when placed on hold An 11 character name can be added to the number There are a maximum of 999 entries If there is no matching number on DID service the call is routed to the operator group Definitions of option are as follows DGT Digits to be received from Trunk line Up to 16 digits may be entered MOH SOURCE Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear in regards to that DID DNIS number if the call is placed on hold There are a total of 6 possible music selections see below NONE Follows the setting in MMC 408 for the trunk the call comes in on TONE A repeated tone is played to the outside party INTERNAL CHIME OLD FOLKS AT HOME This is entered as the directory number of the music source on the MCP2 371 EXTERNAL DEVICE Music Source or Digital announcer This is entered as the directory number of an external music source DIGITAL ANNOUNCEMENT ON AA CARD This is entered as the directory number of the last AA port of an AA card For further details on using an AA port as an MOH source please see MMC 736 VOICE MAIL SOUND FILE If the system has an optional SVMi card installed up to 100 custom recorded sound files from the Voice Mail card can be used for sources Select SVMi port assigned in MMC 756 For information on creating the sound files see SVMi System Administrator Manual Recording greeting by number If you select this option be advised that each
391. unk group There is a maximum number of 32 routes available If more than one trunk group is available for call completion the system uses the first designated trunk group and then starts to utilise succeeding trunk groups If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 712 LCR ROUTE 01 1 Display shows 1 G NONE M 2 Dial LCR ROUTE table number e g 05 LCR ROUTE 05 1 OR 1 G NONE M Press Volume button to selected table and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial TIME BAND index number 1 4 e g 2 LCR ROUTE 05 2 OR 1 G NONE M Press Volume button to selected index and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial LCR COS number 1 8 e g 4 LCR ROUTE 05 2 OR C 4 G NONE M Press Volume button to selected COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Dial TRUNK GROUP access code e g 801 LCR ROUTE 05 2 OR C 4 G 801 Press Volume button to selected access code and press Right Soft button to move cursor Page 2 236 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 6 Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number
392. ure has been programmed The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as 1 COMMON BELL There are up to 3 Common bells available L system and 1 on M System Because there is a common bell port on each MISC card 2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 4 3 STATION OR STATION GROUP Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT port 5 MEMBER List all members that are to be in the group Up to 48 members for the system are allowed in each group but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups 6 NEXT HUNT The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group member 7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all group members are busy When this option is set to OFF the ring back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy Obviously UCD is an exception to this rule 8 GRP AUTOANS When this option is set to ON a group call follows auto answer option also a Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any stations in the group BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry AC
393. utton and enter button to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC 824 ASSIGN NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER Page 2 358 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming Assigns the Q signaling PRI trunk for networking It is assigned data on a per TEPRI card basis PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 821 Display shows 2 Enter first trunk number of PRI card OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter 0 for NORMAL or 1 for Q SIGNALING OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA NORMAL RELATED ITEMS NONE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd DISPLAY LOLI gute NORMAL 20 11 G5 SR Wisc NORMAL POL eue WEN Q SIGNALING Page 2 359 2 Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE Assigns the virtual extension port type The vi
394. utton to save and advance to next MMC DEFAULT DATA NORMAL NONE RELATED ITEMS MMC503 TRUNK WIDE TIMER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 131 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CID CLIP information has been collected on a per trunk basis There are two options for this MMC as follows 0 REPORT NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list These records will continue to be stored in the station review list 1 REPORT YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list These records will also be stored in the station review list In order for these abandoned call records to print on SMDR MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS Option 11 Print Abandoned Call Records must be set to YES PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 415 701 TRK ABNDN Display shows REPORT YES 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 TRK ABNDN OR
395. vance next MMC DEFAULT DATA CONTINUOUS RELATED ITEMS MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 51 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MISC board Each MISC board can have up to a loud bell outputs The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell a station group cannot be assigned PROGRAM BUTTONS VOLUME Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT BUTTONS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC HOLD Clears previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 205 3901 LOUD BELL Display shows current setting RING PAIR NONE 2 Dial loud bell number e g 3902 3902 LOUD BELL OR RING PAIR NONE Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell numbers and press Right Soft button to move the Cursor 3 Enter station number e g 201 3902 LOUD BELL RING PAIR 201 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC DEFAULT DATA UNASSIGNED RELATED ITEMS NONE Page 2 52 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 206 BARGE IN TYPE Se
396. ve cursor 3 Enter option number via dial keypad AA PLAN PROG 05 OR PLAN MSG3 49 Press Volume button to select a option and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter option data via dial keypad AA PLAN PROG 05 OR PLAN MSG3 02 Press Volume button to select a data and press Right Soft button to save and return to step3 5 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC Page 2 288 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 RING PLAN TIME MMC 732 AUTO ATTENDANT TRANS TABLE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page 2 289 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 734 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH It is possible to make 48 customized recordings on the AA ports of AA card For instructions on how to create these recordings see User Instructions Auto Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution System Administration It is important to understand the difference between recordings and messages For example you have customized recording 01 as Thank you for calling and you have customized recording 02 as One moment please By default message 01 is recording 01 When message 01 is selected as part of AA or UCD programming the caller hears thank you for calling recording 01 When message 02 is selected the caller hears one m
397. vided at the time of product release in later time Revision History EDITION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS 00 07 2003 First Edition SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page Ill Introduction OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 Cy This page is intentionally left blank Page IV SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd SAFETY CONCERNS For product safety and correct operation the following information must be given to the operator user and shall be read before the installation and operation Symbols Caution Indication of a general caution Restriction Indication for prohibiting an action for a product Instruction Indication for commanding a specifically required action SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Page V Safety Concerns Page VI OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide Ed 00 N CAUTION Digital Phone Volume Control Program 807 Digital Phone Voice Quality Control seriously affects the system credibility Please call the reseller where you purchased the product to get an expert s advice System Passcode Change When changing the system passcode using Program 900 System Program Delete please call the reseller where you purchased the product to get an expert s advice Compliance with the National Version Standard For the national version OfficeServ50 is designed to comply with the standard of the corresponding country Therefore in case the Pro
398. ws the assignment of system alarms to ring and display the alarms on stations that have the Alarm Key assigned The System Alarm Key is programmed in Station Key Assignments MMC 722 System Alarm key programming is tenant wide tenant 1 and 2 Alarms not programmed to report to the System Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting MMC 851 The alarm buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on a First In First Out FIFO basis Pressing the System Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system Alarm conditions that have multiple causes e g PRI errors and synchronization loss will print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via MMC 851 System Alarm Reporting Alarm Notification Off On 0 1 determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible notification to the System Alarm key station s Pressing the System Alarm key and NOTI the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the System Alarm key and the release key See alarm displays table for assignments Alarm Code Definition CODE ALARM NAME DEFINITION MJA MCP2 Error System Fault 01 MJAO1 POR Restart 2 restart process has been executed via power on restart POR 02 MJA02 Soft Restart 2 restart process has been executed via button reset 03

Programming Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents